diff options
Diffstat (limited to '18450.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 18450.txt | 8322 |
1 files changed, 8322 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/18450.txt b/18450.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7c5bf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/18450.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8322 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Hawaiian Folk Tales, by Various + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Hawaiian Folk Tales + A Collection of Native Legends + +Author: Various + +Editor: Thomas G. Thrum + +Release Date: May 25, 2006 [EBook #18450] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HAWAIIAN FOLK TALES *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This file was +made using scans of public domain works from the University +of Michigan Digital Libraries.) + + + + + + + + + Hawaiian Folk Tales + + A Collection of Native Legends + + + Compiled by + + Thos. G. Thrum + + + With sixteen illustrations from photographs + + + Chicago + A. C. McClurg & Co. + 1907 + + + + + + + Copyright, 1907 + By + A. C. McClurg & Co. + + + Entered at Stationers' Hall, London, England + Published March 1, 1907 + + + The Lakeside Press + R. R. Donnelley & Sons Company + Chicago + + + + + +PREFACE + + +It is becoming more and more a matter of regret that a larger amount +of systematic effort was not established in early years for the +gathering and preservation of the folk-lore of the Hawaiians. The +world is under lasting obligations to the late Judge Fornander, +and to Dr. Rae before him, for their painstaking efforts to gather +the history of this people and trace their origin and migrations; +but Fornander's work only has seen the light, Dr. Rae's manuscript +having been accidentally destroyed by fire. + +The early attempts of Dibble and Pogue to gather history from Hawaiians +themselves have preserved to native and foreign readers much that +would probably otherwise have been lost. To the late Judge Andrews we +are indebted for a very full grammar and dictionary of the language, +as also for a valuable manuscript collection of _meles_ and antiquarian +literature that passed to the custody of the Board of Education. + +There were native historians in those days; the newspaper articles +of S. M. Kamakau, the earlier writings of David Malo, and the later +contributions of G. W. Pilipo and others are but samples of a wealth +of material, most of which has been lost forever to the world. From +time to time Prof. W. D. Alexander, as also C. J. Lyons, has furnished +interesting extracts from these and other hakus. + +The Rev. A. O. Forbes devoted some time and thought to the collecting +of island folk-lore: and King Kalakaua took some pains in this line +also, as evidenced by his volume of "Legends and Myths of Hawaii," +edited by R. M. Daggett, though there is much therein that is wholly +foreign to ancient Hawaiian customs and thought. No one of late years +had a better opportunity than Kalakaua toward collecting the _meles_, +_kaaos_, and traditions of his race; and for purposes looking to +this end there was established by law a Board of Genealogy, which +had an existence of some four years, but nothing of permanent value +resulted therefrom. + +Fornander's manuscript collection of _meles_, legends, and genealogies +in the vernacular has fortunately become, by purchase, the property +of the Hon. C. R. Bishop, which insures for posterity the result of +one devoted scholar's efforts to rescue the ancient traditions that +are gradually slipping away; for the _haku meles_ (bards) of Hawaii +are gone. This fact, as also the Hawaiian Historical Society's desire +to aid and stimulate research into the history and traditions of this +people, strengthens the hope that some one may yet arise to give us +further insight into the legendary folk-lore of this interesting race. + +T. G. T. + +_Honolulu_, January 1, 1907. + + + + + + +NOTE + + +In response to repeated requests, the compiler now presents in book +form the series of legends that have been made a feature of "The +Hawaiian Annual" for a number of years past. The series has been +enriched by the addition of several tales, the famous shark legend +having been furnished for this purpose from the papers of the Hawaiian +Historical Society. + +The collection embraces contributions by the Rev. A. O. Forbes, +Dr. N. B. Emerson, J. S. Emerson, Mrs. E. M. Nakuina, W. M. Gibson, +Dr. C. M. Hyde, and others, all of whom are recognized authorities. + +T. G. T. + +_Honolulu_, January 1, 1907. + + + + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. Legends Resembling Old Testament History. + Rev. C. M. Hyde, D.D. 15 + + II. Exploits of Maui. + Rev. A. O. Forbes + + I. Snaring the Sun 31 + II. The Origin of Fire 33 + + III. Pele and the Deluge. + Rev. A. O. Forbes 36 + + IV. Pele and Kahawali. + From Ellis's "Tour of Hawaii" 39 + + V. Hiku and Kawelu. + J. S. Emerson 43 + + Location of the Lua o Milu 48 + + VI. Lonopuha; or, Origin of the Art of Healing in Hawaii. + Translated by Thos. G. Thrum 51 + + VII. A Visit to the Spirit Land; or, The Strange Experience of + a Woman in Kona, Hawaii. + Mrs. E. N. Haley 58 + + VIII. Kapeepeekauila; or, The Rocks of Kana. + Rev. A. O. Forbes 63 + + IX. Kalelealuaka. + Dr. N. B. Emerson 74 + + X. Stories of the Menehunes: Hawaii the Original Home of the + Brownies. + Thos. G. Thrum 107 + + Moke Manu's Account 109 + Pi's Watercourse 110 + Laka's Adventure 111 + Kekupua's Canoe 114 + As Heiau Builders 116 + + XI. Kahalaopuna, Princess of Manoa. + Mrs. E. M. Nakuina 118 + + XII. The Punahou Spring. + Mrs. E. M. Nakuina 133 + + XIII. Oahunui. + Mrs. E. M. Nakuina 139 + + XIV. Ahuula: A Legend of Kanikaniaula and the First Feather Cloak. + Mrs. E. M. Nakuina 147 + + XV. Kaala and Kaaialii: A Legend of Lanai. + W. M. Gibson 156 + + XVI. The Tomb of Puupehe: A Legend of Lanai. + From "The Hawaiian Gazette" 181 + + XVII. Ai Kanaka: A Legend of Molokai. + Rev. A. O. Forbes 186 + + XVIII. Kaliuwaa. Scene of the Demigod Kamapuaa's Escape from + Olopana. + From "The Hawaiian Spectator" 193 + + XIX. Battle of the Owls. + Jos. M. Poepoe 200 + + XX. This Land is the Sea's. Traditional Account of an Ancient + Hawaiian Prophecy. + Translated from Moke Manu by Thos. G. Thrum 203 + + XXI. Ku-ula, the Fish God of Hawaii. + Translated from Moke Manu by M. K. Nakuina 215 + + XXII. Aiai, Son of Ku-ula. Part II of the Legend of Ku-ula, + the Fish God of Hawaii. + Translated from Moke Manu by M. K. Nakuina 230 + + XXIII. Kaneaukai: A Legend of Waialua. + Thos. G. Thrum 250 + + XXIV. The Shark-man, Nanaue. + Mrs. E. M. Nakuina 255 + + XXV. Fish Stories and Superstitions. + Translated by M. K. Nakuina 269 + + + Glossary 277 + + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + +Hawaiian Girl of the Old Regime Frontispiece + +A Lava Cascade 40 + +View in Wainiha Valley, Kauai 66 + +Scene in Olokele Gulch, Makaweli, Kauai 86 + +"The Deep Blue Palis of Koolau" 104 + +Scene from the Road over Nuuanu Pali 112 + +View at the Head of Manoa Valley, Oahu 120 + +The Favorite Sport of Surf-Riding 130 + +Hawaiian Arrayed in Feather Cloak and Helmet 150 + +The Ceremony of the Hula 158 + +The Hula Dance 162 + +Kuumana, the Rain God of Kau 196 + +A Grass House of the Olden Time 210 + +Making Ready the Feast 228 + +Hawaiian Fisherman Using the Throw-Net 246 + +Coast Surf Scene 262 + + + + + + + + + + + +I + +LEGENDS RESEMBLING OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY + +_Rev. C. M. Hyde, D.D._ + + +In the first volume of Judge Fornander's elaborate work on "The +Polynesian Race" he has given some old Hawaiian legends which closely +resemble the Old Testament history. How shall we account for such +coincidences? + +Take, for instance, the Hawaiian account of the Creation. The +_Kane_, _Ku_ and _Lono:_ or, Sunlight, Substance, and Sound,--these +constituted a triad named _Ku-Kaua-Kahi_, or the Fundamental Supreme +Unity. In worship the reverence due was expressed by such epithets as +_Hi-ka-po-loa, Oi-e,_ Most Excellent, etc. "These gods existed from +eternity, from and before chaos, or, as the Hawaiian term expressed +it, '_mai ka po mia_' (from the time of night, darkness, chaos). By +an act of their will these gods dissipated or broke into pieces the +existing, surrounding, all-containing _po_, night, or chaos. By this +act light entered into space. They then created the heavens, three in +number, as a place to dwell in; and the earth to be their footstool, +_he keehina honua a Kane_. Next they created the sun, moon, stars, +and a host of angels, or spirits--_i kini akua_--to minister to +them. Last of all they created man as the model, or in the likeness +of Kane. The body of the first man was made of red earth--_lepo ula_, +or _alaea_--and the spittle of the gods--_wai nao_. His head was made +of a whitish clay--_palolo_--which was brought from the four ends of +the world by Lono. When the earth-image of Kane was ready, the three +gods breathed into its nose, and called on it to rise, and it became +a living being. Afterwards the first woman was created from one of +the ribs--_lalo puhaka_--of the man while asleep, and these two were +the progenitors of all mankind. They are called in the chants and in +various legends by a large number of different names; but the most +common for the man was Kumuhonua, and for the woman Keolakuhonua +[or _Lalahonua_]. + +"Of the creation of animals these chants are silent; but from the +pure tradition it may be inferred that the earth at the time of its +creation or emergence from the watery chaos was stocked with vegetable +and animal. The animals specially mentioned in the tradition as having +been created by Kane were hogs (_puaa_), dogs (_ilio_), lizards or +reptiles (_moo_). + +"Another legend of the series, that of _Wela-ahi-lani_, states +that after Kane had destroyed the world by fire, on account of the +wickedness of the people then living, he organized it as it now is, +and created the first man and the first woman, with the assistance +of Ku and Lono, nearly in the same manner as narrated in the former +legend of Kumuhonua. In this legend the man is called Wela-ahi-lani, +and the woman is called Owe." + +Of the primeval home, the original ancestral seat of mankind, +Hawaiian traditions speak in highest praise. "It had a number of +names of various meanings, though the most generally occurring, +and said to be the oldest, was _Kalana-i-hau-ola_ (Kalana with +the life-giving dew). It was situated in a large country, or +continent, variously called in the legends Kahiki-honua-kele, +Kahiki-ku, Kapa-kapa-ua-a-Kane, Molo-lani. Among other names +for the primary homestead, or paradise, are _Pali-uli_ (the blue +mountain), _Aina-i-ka-kaupo-o-Kane_ (the land in the heart of Kane), +_Aina-wai-akua-a-Kane_ (the land of the divine water of Kane). The +tradition says of Pali-uli, that it was a sacred, tabooed land; that +a man must be righteous to attain it; if faulty or sinful he will not +get there; if he looks behind he will not get there; if he prefers his +family he will not enter Pali-uli." "Among other adornments of the +Polynesian Paradise, the Kalana-i-hau-ola, there grew the _Ulu kapu +a Kane_, the breadfruit tabooed for Kane, and the _ohia hemolele_, +the sacred apple-tree. The priests of the olden time are said to +have held that the tabooed fruits of these trees were in some manner +connected with the trouble and death of Kumuhonua and Lalahonua, +the first man and the first woman. Hence in the ancient chants he is +called _Kane-laa-uli, Kumu-uli, Kulu-ipo_, the fallen chief, he who +fell on account of the tree, or names of similar import." + +According to those legends of Kumuhonua and Wela-ahi-lani, "at the +time when the gods created the stars, they also created a multitude +of angels, or spirits (_i kini akua_), who were not created like +men, but made from the spittle of the gods (_i kuhaia_), to be their +servants or messengers. These spirits, or a number of them, disobeyed +and revolted, because they were denied the _awa_; which means that +they were not permitted to be worshipped, _awa_ being a sacrificial +offering and sign of worship. These evil spirits did not prevail, +however, but were conquered by Kane, and thrust down into uttermost +darkness (_ilalo loa i ka po_). The chief of these spirits was called +by some Kanaloa, by others Milu, the ruler of Po; Akua ino; Kupu ino, +the evil spirit. Other legends, however, state that the veritable and +primordial lord of the Hawaiian inferno was called Manua. The inferno +itself bore a number of names, such as Po-pau-ole, Po-kua-kini, +Po-kini-kini, Po-papa-ia-owa, Po-ia-milu. Milu, according to those +other legends, was a chief of superior wickedness on earth who was +thrust down into Po, but who was really both inferior and posterior to +Manua. This inferno, this Po, with many names, one of which remarkably +enough was _Ke-po-lua-ahi_, the pit of fire, was not an entirely +dark place. There was light of some kind and there was fire. The +legends further tell us that when Kane, Ku, and Lono were creating +the first man from the earth, Kanaloa was present, and in imitation +of Kane, attempted to make another man out of the earth. When his +clay model was ready, he called to it to become alive, but no life +came to it. Then Kanaloa became very angry, and said to Kane, 'I +will take your man, and he shall die,' and so it happened. Hence the +first man got his other name _Kumu-uli_, which means a fallen chief, +_he 'lii kahuli_.... With the Hawaiians, Kanaloa is the personified +spirit of evil, the origin of death, the prince of Po, or chaos, and +yet a revolted, disobedient spirit, who was conquered and punished by +Kane. The introduction and worship of Kanaloa, as one of the great +gods in the Hawaiian group, can be traced back only to the time of +the immigration from the southern groups, some eight hundred years +ago. In the more ancient chants he is never mentioned in conjunction +with Kane, Ku, and Lono, and even in later Hawaiian mythology he never +took precedence of Kane. The Hawaiian legend states that the oldest +son of Kumuhonua, the first man, was called Laka, and that the next +was called Ahu, and that Laka was a bad man; he killed his brother Ahu. + +"There are these different Hawaiian genealogies, going back with +more or less agreement among themselves to the first created man. The +genealogy of Kumuhonua gives thirteen generations inclusive to Nuu, +or Kahinalii, or the line of Laka, the oldest son of Kumuhonua. (The +line of Seth from Adam to Noah counts ten generations.) The second +genealogy, called that of Kumu-uli, was of greatest authority among +the highest chiefs down to the latest times, and it was taboo to teach +it to the common people. This genealogy counts fourteen generations +from Huli-houna, the first man, to Nuu, or Nana-nuu, but inclusive, +on the line of Laka. The third genealogy, which, properly speaking, +is that of Paao, the high-priest who came with Pili from Tahiti, +about twenty-five generations ago, and was a reformer of the Hawaiian +priesthood, and among whose descendants it has been preserved, counts +only twelve generations from Kumuhonua to Nuu, on the line of Kapili, +youngest son of Kumuhonua." + +"In the Hawaiian group there are several legends of the Flood. One +legend relates that in the time of Nuu, or Nana-nuu (also pronounced +_lana_, that is, floating), the flood, _Kaiakahinalii_, came upon +the earth, and destroyed all living beings; that Nuu, by command of +his god, built a large vessel with a house on top of it, which was +called and is referred to in chants as '_He waa halau Alii o ka Moku_,' +the royal vessel, in which he and his family, consisting of his wife, +Lilinoe, his three sons and their wives, were saved. When the flood +subsided, Kane, Ku, and Lono entered the _waa halau_ of Nuu, and told +him to go out. He did so, and found himself on the top of Mauna Kea +(the highest mountain on the island of Hawaii). He called a cave +there after the name of his wife, and the cave remains there to this +day--as the legend says in testimony of the fact. Other versions of the +legend say that Nuu landed and dwelt in Kahiki-honua-kele, a large and +extensive country." ... "Nuu left the vessel in the evening of the day +and took with him a pig, cocoanuts, and _awa_ as an offering to the +god Kane. As he looked up he saw the moon in the sky. He thought it +was the god, saying to himself, 'You are Kane, no doubt, though you +have transformed yourself to my sight.' So he worshipped the moon, +and offered his offerings. Then Kane descended on the rainbow and +spoke reprovingly to Nuu, but on account of the mistake Nuu escaped +punishment, having asked pardon of Kane." ... "Nuu's three sons were +Nalu-akea, Nalu-hoo-hua, and Nalu-mana-mana. In the tenth generation +from Nuu arose Lua-nuu, or the second Nuu, known also in the legend +as Kane-hoa-lani, Kupule, and other names. The legend adds that by +command of his god he was the first to introduce circumcision to be +practised among his descendants. He left his native home and moved a +long way off until he reached a land called Honua-ilalo, 'the southern +country.' Hence he got the name Lalo-kona, and his wife was called +Honua-po-ilalo. He was the father of Ku-nawao by his slave-woman Ahu +(O-ahu) and of Kalani-menehune by his wife, Mee-hewa. Another says +that the god Kane ordered Lua-nuu to go up on a mountain and perform +a sacrifice there. Lua-nuu looked among the mountains of Kahiki-ku, +but none of them appeared suitable for the purpose. Then Lua-nuu +inquired of God where he might find a proper place. God replied to +him: 'Go travel to the eastward, and where you find a sharp-peaked +hill projecting precipitously into the ocean, that is the hill for +the sacrifice.' Then Lua-nuu and his son, Kupulu-pulu-a-Nuu, and his +servant, Pili-lua-nuu, started off in their boat to the eastward. In +remembrance of this event the Hawaiians called the back of Kualoa +_Koo-lau_; Oahu (after one of Lua-nuu's names), _Kane-hoa-lani_; +and the smaller hills in front of it were named _Kupu-pulu_ and +_Pili-lua-nuu_. Lua-nuu is the tenth descendant from Nuu by both the +oldest and the youngest of Nuu's sons. This oldest son is represented +to have been the progenitor of the _Kanaka-maoli_, the people living +on the mainland of Kane (_Aina kumupuaa a Kane_): the youngest was the +progenitor of the white people (_ka poe keo keo maoli_). This Lua-nuu +(like Abraham, the tenth from Noah, also like Abraham), through his +grandson, Kini-lau-a-mano, became the ancestor of the twelve children +of the latter, and the original founder of the Menehune people, +from whom this legend makes the Polynesian family descend." + +The Rev. Sheldon Dibble, in his history of the Sandwich Islands, +published at Lahainaluna, in 1843, gives a tradition which very +much resembles the history of Joseph. "Waikelenuiaiku was one of ten +brethren who had one sister. They were all the children of one father, +whose name was Waiku. Waikelenuiaiku was much beloved by his father, +but his brethren hated him. On account of their hatred they carried him +and cast him into a pit belonging to Holonaeole. The oldest brother +had pity on him, and gave charge to Holonaeole to take good care of +him. Waikelenuiaiku escaped and fled to a country over which reigned a +king whose name was Kamohoalii. There he was thrown into a dark place, +a pit under ground, in which many persons were confined for various +crimes. Whilst confined in this dark place he told his companions to +dream dreams and tell them to him. The night following four of the +prisoners had dreams. The first dreamed that he saw a ripe _ohia_ +(native apple), and his spirit ate it; the second dreamed that he saw +a ripe banana, and his spirit ate it; the third dreamed that he saw a +hog, and his spirit ate it; and the fourth dreamed that he saw _awa_, +pressed out the juice, and his spirit drank it. The first three dreams, +pertaining to food, Waikelenuiaiku interpreted unfavorably, and told +the dreamers they must prepare to die. The fourth dream, pertaining to +drink, he interpreted to signify deliverance and life. The first three +dreamers were slain according to the interpretation, and the fourth +was delivered and saved. Afterward this last dreamer told Kamohoalii, +the king of the land, how wonderful was the skill of Waikelenuiaiku in +interpreting dreams, and the king sent and delivered him from prison +and made him a principal chief in his kingdom." + +Judge Fornander alludes to this legend, giving the name, +however, _Aukelenui-a-Iku_, and adding to it the account of +the hero's journey to the place where the water of life was +kept (_ka-wai-ola-loa-a-Kane_), his obtaining it and therewith +resuscitating his brothers, who had been killed by drowning some +years before. Another striking similarity is that furnished to Judge +Fornander in the legend of _Ke-alii-waha-nui_: "He was king of the +country called Honua-i-lalo. He oppressed the Menehune people. Their +god Kane sent Kane-apua and Kaneloa, his elder brother, to bring the +people away, and take them to the land which Kane had given them, and +which was called _Ka aina momona a Kane_, or _Ka one lauena a Kane_, +and also _Ka aina i ka haupo a Kane_. The people were then told to +observe the four Ku days in the beginning of the month as _Kapu-hoano_ +(sacred or holy days), in remembrance of this event, because they +thus arose (_Ku_) to depart from that land. Their offerings on the +occasion were swine and goats." The narrator of the legend explains +that formerly there were goats without horns, called _malailua_, +on the slopes of Mauna Loa on Hawaii, and that they were found there +up to the time of Kamehameha I. The legend further relates that after +leaving the land of Honualalo, the people came to the _Kai-ula-a-Kane_ +(the Red Sea of Kane); that they were pursued by Ke-alii-waha-nui; +that Kane-apua and Kanaloa prayed to Lono, and finally reached the +_Aina lauena a Kane_. + +"In the famous Hawaiian legend of _Hiiaka-i-ka-poli-o-Pele_, it +is said that when Hiiaka went to the island of Kauai to recover +and restore to life the body of Lohiau, the lover of her sister, +Pele, she arrived at the foot of the Kalalau Mountain shortly before +sunset. Being told by her friends at Haena that there would not be +daylight sufficient to climb the _pali_ (precipice) and get the body +out of the cave in which it was hidden, she prayed to her gods to keep +the sun stationary (_i ka muli o Hea_) over the brook Hea, until she +had accomplished her object. The prayer was heard, the mountain was +climbed, the guardians of the cave vanquished, and the body recovered." + +A story of retarding the sun and making the day longer to accomplish +his purpose is told of Maui-a-kalana, according to Dibble's history. + +Judge Fornander alludes to one other legend with incidents similar to +the Old Testament history wherein "Na-ula-a-Mainea, an Oahu prophet, +left Oahu for Kauai, was upset in his canoe, was swallowed by a whale, +and thrown up alive on the beach at Wailua, Kauai." + +Judge Fornander says that, when he first heard the legend of the two +brother prophets delivering the Menehune people, "he was inclined to +doubt its genuineness and to consider it as a paraphrase or adaptation +of the Biblical account by some semi-civilized or semi-Christianized +Hawaiian, after the discovery of the group by Captain Cook. But a +larger and better acquaintance with Hawaiian folk-lore has shown that +though the details of the legend, as interpreted by the Christian +Hawaiian from whom it was received, may possibly in some degree, and +unconsciously to him, perhaps, have received a Biblical coloring, yet +the main facts of the legend, with the identical names of persons and +places, are referred to more or less distinctly in other legends of +undoubted antiquity." And the Rev. Mr. Dibble, in his history, says +of these Hawaiian legends, that "they were told to the missionaries +before the Bible was translated into the Hawaiian tongue, and before +the people knew much of sacred history. The native who acted as +assistant in translating the history of Joseph was forcibly struck +with its similarity to their ancient tradition. Neither is there +the least room for supposing that the songs referred to are recent +inventions. They can all be traced back for generations, and are +known by various persons residing on different islands who have had +no communication with each other. Some of them have their date in +the reign of some ancient king, and others have existed time out of +mind. It may also be added, that both their narrations and songs are +known the best by the very oldest of the people, and those who never +learned to read; whose education and training were under the ancient +system of heathenism." + +"Two hypotheses," says Judge Fornander, "may with some plausibility be +suggested to account for this remarkable resemblance of folk-lore. One +is, that during the time of the Spanish galleon trade, in the sixteenth +and seventeenth centuries, between the Spanish Main and Manila, +some shipwrecked people, Spaniards and Portuguese, had obtained +sufficient influence to introduce these scraps of Bible history +into the legendary lore of this people.... On this fact hypothesis +I remark that, if the shipwrecked foreigners were educated men, or +only possessed of such Scriptural knowledge as was then imparted to +the commonality of laymen, it is morally impossible to conceive that +a Spaniard of the sixteenth century should confine his instruction to +some of the leading events of the Old Testament, and be totally silent +upon the Christian dispensation, and the cruciolatry, mariolatry, +and hagiolatry of that day. And it is equally impossible to conceive +that the Hawaiian listeners, chiefs, priests, or commoners, should have +retained and incorporated so much of the former in their own folk-lore, +and yet have utterly forgotten every item bearing upon the latter. + +"The other hypothesis is, that at some remote period either a body +of the scattered Israelites had arrived at these islands direct, or +in Malaysia, before the exodus of 'the Polynesian family,' and thus +imparted a knowledge of their doctrines, of the early life of their +ancestors, and of some of their peculiar customs, and that having +been absorbed by the people among whom they found a refuge, this is +all that remains to attest their presence--intellectual tombstones +over a lost and forgotten race, yet sufficient after twenty-six +centuries of silence to solve in some measure the ethnic puzzle of +the lost tribes of Israel. In regard to this second hypothesis, it +is certainly more plausible and cannot be so curtly disposed of as +the Spanish theory.... So far from being copied one from the other, +they are in fact independent and original versions of a once common +legend, or series of legends, held alike by Cushite, Semite, Turanian, +and Aryan, up to a certain time, when the divergencies of national +life and other causes brought other subjects peculiar to each other +prominently in the foreground; and that as these divergencies hardened +into system and creed, that grand old heirloom of a common past became +overlaid and colored by the peculiar social and religious atmosphere +through which it has passed up to the surface of the present time. But +besides this general reason for refusing to adopt the Israelitish +theory, that the Polynesian legends were introduced by fugitive or +emigrant Hebrews from the subverted kingdoms of Israel or Judah, +there is the more special reason to be added that the organization +and splendor of Solomon's empire, his temple, and his wisdom became +proverbial among the nations of the East subsequent to his time; +on all these, the Polynesian legends are absolutely silent." + +In commenting on the legend of _Hiiaka-i-ka-poli-o-Pele_, Judge +Fornander says: "If the Hebrew legend of Joshua or a Cushite version +give rise to it, it only brings down the community of legends a little +later in time. And so would the legend of _Naulu-a-Mahea_,... unless +the legend of Jonah, with which it corresponds in a measure, as well +as the previous legend of Joshua and the sun, were Hebrew anachronisms +compiled and adapted in later times from long antecedent materials, +of which the Polynesian references are but broken and distorted echoes, +bits of legendary mosaics, displaced from their original surroundings +and made to fit with later associations." + +In regard to the account of the Creation, he remarks that "the Hebrew +legend infers that the god Elohim existed contemporaneously with +and apart from the chaos. The Hawaiian legend makes the three great +gods, Kane, Ku, and Lono, evolve themselves out of chaos.... The +order of creation, according to Hawaiian folk-lore, was that after +Heaven and earth had been separated, and the ocean had been stocked +with its animals, the stars were created, then the moon, then the +sun." Alluding to the fact that the account in Genesis is truer to +nature, Judge Fornander nevertheless propounds the inquiry whether +this fact may not "indicate that the Hebrew text is a later emendation +of an older but once common tradition"? + +Highest antiquity is claimed for Hawaiian traditions in regard to +events subsequent to the creation of man. "In one of the sacrificial +hymns of the Marquesans, when human victims were offered, frequent +allusions were made to 'the red apples eaten in Naoau,' ... and to the +'tabooed apples of Atea,' as the cause of death, wars, pestilence, +famine, and other calamities, only to be averted or atoned for by the +sacrifice of human victims. The close connection between the Hawaiian +and the Marquesan legends indicates a common origin, and that origin +can be no other than that from which the Chaldean and Hebrew legends +of sacred trees, disobedience, and fall also sprang." In comparison of +"the Hawaiian myth of Kanaloa as a fallen angel antagonistic to the +great gods, as the spirit of evil and death in the world, the Hebrew +legends are more vague and indefinite as to the existence of an evil +principle. The serpent of Genesis, the Satan of Job, the Hillel of +Isaiah, the dragon of the Apocalypse--all point, however, to the +same underlying idea that the first cause of sin, death, evil, and +calamities, was to be found in disobedience and revolt from God. They +appear as disconnected scenes of a once grand drama that in olden +times riveted the attention of mankind, and of which, strange to +say, the clearest synopsis and the most coherent recollection are, +so far, to be found in Polynesian traditions. It is probably in vain +to inquire with whom the legend of an evil spirit and his operations +in Heaven and on earth had its origin. Notwithstanding the apparent +unity of design and remarkable coincidence in many points, yet the +differences in coloring, detail, and presentation are too great to +suppose the legend borrowed by one from either of the others. It +probably descended to the Chaldeans, Polynesians, and Hebrews alike, +from a source or people anterior to themselves, of whom history now +is silent." + + + + +II + +EXPLOITS OF MAUI + +_Rev. A. O. Forbes_ + + + +I.--SNARING THE SUN + + +Maui was the son of Hina-lau-ae and Hina, and they dwelt at a place +called Makalia, above Kahakuloa, on West Maui. Now, his mother Hina +made _kapas_. And as she spread them out to dry, the days were so +short that she was put to great trouble and labor in hanging them +out and taking them in day after day until they were dry. Maui, +seeing this, was filled with pity for her, for the days were so +short that, no sooner had she got her kapas all spread out to dry, +than the Sun went down, and she had to take them in again. So he +determined to make the Sun go slower. He first went to Wailohi, in +Hamakua, on East Maui, to observe the motions of the Sun. There he +saw that it rose toward Hana. He then went up on Haleakala, and saw +that the Sun in its course came directly over that mountain. He then +went home again, and after a few days went to a place called Paeloko, +at Waihee. There he cut down all the cocoanut-trees, and gathered the +fibre of the cocoanut husks in great quantity. This he manufactured +into strong cord. One Moemoe, seeing this, said tauntingly to him: +"Thou wilt never catch the Sun. Thou art an idle nobody." + +Maui answered: "When I conquer my enemy, and my desire is attained, +I will be your death." So he went up Haleakala again, taking his +cord with him. And when the Sun arose above where he was stationed, +he prepared a noose of the cord and, casting it, snared one of the +Sun's larger beams and broke it off. And thus he snared and broke off, +one after another, all the strong rays of the Sun. + +Then shouted he exultingly: "Thou art my captive, and now I will kill +thee for thy going so swiftly." + +And the Sun said: "Let me live, and thou shalt see me go more slowly +hereafter. Behold, hast thou not broken off all my strong legs, +and left me only the weak ones?" + +So the agreement was made, and Maui permitted the Sun to pursue +its course, and from that time on it went more slowly; and that is +the reason why the days are longer at one season of the year than at +another. It was this that gave the name to that mountain, which should +properly be called _Alehe-ka-la_ (sun snarer), and not _Haleakala_. + +When Maui returned from this exploit, he went to find Moemoe, who +had reviled him. But that individual was not at home. He went on in +his pursuit till he came upon him at a place called Kawaiopilopilo, +on the shore to the eastward of the black rock called Kekaa, north +of Lahaina. Moemoe dodged him up hill and down, until at last Maui, +growing wroth, leaped upon and slew the fugitive. And the dead body +was transformed into a long rock, which is there to this day, by the +side of the road. + + + +II.--THE ORIGIN OF FIRE + + +Maui and Hina dwelt together, and to them were born four sons, whose +names were Maui-mua, Maui-hope, Maui-kiikii, and Maui-o-ka-lana. These +four were fishermen. One morning, just as the edge of the Sun lifted +itself up, Maui-mua roused his brethren to go fishing. So they +launched their canoe from the beach at Kaupo, on the island of Maui, +where they were dwelling, and proceeded to the fishing ground. Having +arrived there, they were beginning to fish, when Maui-o-ka-lana saw the +light of a fire on the shore they had left, and said to his brethren: +"Behold, there is a fire burning. Whose can this fire be?" + +And they answered: "Whose, indeed? Let us return to the shore, that +we may get our food cooked; but first let us get some fish." + +So, after they had obtained some fish, they turned toward the shore; +and when the canoe touched the beach Maui-mua leaped ashore and ran +toward the spot where the fire had been burning. Now, the curly-tailed +_alae_ (mud-hens) were the keepers of the fire; and when they saw +him coming they scratched the fire out and flew away. Maui-mua was +defeated, and returned to the house to his brethren. + +Then said they to him: "How about the fire?" + +"How, indeed?" he answered. "When I got there, behold, there was +no fire; it was out. I supposed some man had the fire, and behold, +it was not so; the alae are the proprietors of the fire, and our +bananas are all stolen." + +When they heard that, they were filled with anger, and decided not +to go fishing again, but to wait for the next appearance of the +fire. But after many days had passed without their seeing the fire, +they went fishing again, and behold, there was the fire! And so they +were continually tantalized. Only when they were out fishing would +the fire appear, and when they returned they could not find it. + +This was the way of it. The curly-tailed alae knew that Maui and +Hina had only these four sons, and if any of them stayed on shore +to watch the fire while the others were out in the canoe the alae +knew it by counting those in the canoe, and would not light the +fire. Only when they could count four men in the canoe would they +light the fire. So Maui-mua thought it over, and said to his brethren: +"To-morrow morning do you go fishing, and I will stay ashore. But do +you take the calabash and dress it in kapa, and put it in my place +in the canoe, and then go out to fish." + +They did so, and when they went out to fish the next morning, the alae +counted and saw four figures in the canoe, and then they lit the fire +and put the bananas on to roast. Before they were fully baked one of +the alae cried out: "Our dish is cooked! Behold, Hina has a smart son." + +And with that, Maui-mua, who had stolen close to them unperceived, +leaped forward, seized the curly-tailed alae and exclaimed: "Now +I will kill you, you scamp of an alae! Behold, it is you who are +keeping the fire from us. I will be the death of you for this." + +Then answered the alae: "If you kill me the secret dies with me, +and you won't get the fire." As Maui-mua began to wring its neck, the +alae again spoke, and said: "Let me live, and you shall have the fire." + +So Maui-mua said: "Tell me, where is the fire?" + +The alae replied: "It is in the leaf of the a-pe plant" (_Alocasia +macrorrhiza_). + +So, by the direction of the alae, Maui-mua began to rub the leaf-stalk +of the a-pe plant with a piece of stick, but the fire would not +come. Again he asked: "Where is this fire that you are hiding from me?" + +The alae answered: "In a green stick." + +And he rubbed a green stick, but got no fire. So it went on, until +finally the alae told him he would find it in a dry stick; and so, +indeed, he did. But Maui-mua, in revenge for the conduct of the alae, +after he had got the fire from the dry stick, said: "Now, there is +one thing more to try." And he rubbed the top of the alae's head till +it was red with blood, and the red spot remains there to this day. + + + + +III + +PELE AND THE DELUGE + +_Rev. A. O. Forbes_ + + +All volcanic phenomena are associated in Hawaiian legendary lore +with the goddess Pele; and it is a somewhat curious fact that to +the same celebrated personage is also attributed a great flood that +occurred in ancient times. The legends of this flood are various, +but mainly connected with the doings of Pele in this part of the +Pacific Ocean. The story runs thus: + +Kahinalii was the mother of Pele; Kanehoalani was her father; and +her two brothers were Kamohoalii and Kahuilaokalani. Pele was born +in the land of Hapakuela, a far-distant land at the edge of the sky, +toward the southwest. There she lived with her parents until she was +grown up, when she married Wahialoa; and to these were born a daughter +named Laka, and a son named Menehune. But after a time Pele's husband, +Wahialoa, was enticed away from her by Pele-kumulani. The deserted +Pele, being much displeased and troubled in mind on account of her +husband, started on her travels in search of him, and came in the +direction of the Hawaiian Islands. Now, at that time these islands were +a vast waste. There was no sea, nor was there any fresh water. When +Pele set out on her journey, her parents gave her the sea to go with +her and bear her canoes onward. So she sailed forward, flood-borne by +the sea, until she reached the land of Pakuela, and thence onward to +the land of Kanaloa. From her head she poured forth the sea as she +went, and her brothers composed the celebrated ancient mele: + + + O the sea, the great sea! + Forth bursts the sea: + Behold, it bursts on Kanaloa! + + +But the waters of the sea continued to rise until only the highest +points of the great mountains, Haleakala, Maunakea, and Maunaloa, +were visible; all else was covered. Afterward the sea receded until it +reached its present level. This event is called the _Kai a Kahinalii_ +(Sea of Kahinalii), because it was from Kahinalii, her mother, that +Pele received the gift of the sea, and she herself only brought it +to Hawaii. + +And from that time to this, Pele and all her family forsook their +former land of Hapakuela and have dwelt in Hawaii-nei, Pele coming +first and the rest following at a later time. + +On her first arrival at Hawaii-nei, Pele dwelt on the island of +Kauai. From there she went to Kalaupapa, [1] on the island of +Molokai, and dwelt in the crater of Kauhako at that place; thence +she departed to Puulaina, [2] near Lahainaluna, where she dug out +that crater. Afterward she moved still further to Haleakala, where +she stayed until she hollowed out that great crater; and finally she +settled at Kilauea, on the island of Hawaii, where she has remained +ever since. [3] + + + + +IV + +PELE AND KAHAWALI + +_From Ellis's "Tour of Hawaii"_ + + +In the reign of Kealiikukii, an ancient king of Hawaii, Kahawali, +chief of Puna, and one of his favorite companions went one day to +amuse themselves with the _holua_ (sled), on the sloping side of a +hill, which is still called _ka holua ana o Kahawali_ (Kahawali's +sliding-place). Vast numbers of the people gathered at the bottom of +the hill to witness the game, and a company of musicians and dancers +repaired thither to add to the amusement of the spectators. The +performers began their dance, and amidst the sound of drums and the +songs of the musicians the sledding of Kahawali and his companion +commenced. The hilarity of the occasion attracted the attention of +Pele, the goddess of the volcano, who came down from Kilauea to witness +the sport. Standing on the summit of the hill in the form of a woman, +she challenged Kahawali to slide with her. He accepted the offer, +and they set off together down the hill. Pele, less acquainted with +the art of balancing herself on the narrow sled than her rival, was +beaten, and Kahawali was applauded by the spectators as he returned +up the side of the hill. + +Before starting again, Pele asked him to give her his _papa holua_, +but he, supposing from her appearance that she was no more than a +native woman, said: "_Aole!_ (no!) Are you my wife, that you should +obtain my sled?" And, as if impatient at being delayed, he adjusted his +papa, ran a few yards to take a spring, and then, with this momentum +and all his strength he threw himself upon it and shot down the hill. + +Pele, incensed at his answer, stamped her foot on the ground and +an earthquake followed, which rent the hill in sunder. She called, +and fire and liquid lava arose, and, assuming her supernatural form, +with these irresistible ministers of vengeance, she followed down +the hill. When Kahawali reached the bottom, he arose, and on looking +behind saw Pele, accompanied by thunder and lightning, earthquake, and +streams of burning lava, closely pursuing him. He took up his broad +spear which he had stuck in the ground at the beginning of the game, +and, accompanied by his friend, fled for his life. The musicians, +dancers, and crowds of spectators were instantly overwhelmed by the +fiery torrent, which, bearing on its foremost wave the enraged goddess, +continued to pursue Kahawali and his companion. They ran till they +came to an eminence called Puukea. Here Kahawali threw off his cloak +of netted ki leaves and proceeded toward his house, which stood near +the shore. He met his favorite pig and saluted it by touching noses, +then ran to the house of his mother, who lived at Kukii, saluted her by +touching noses, and said: "_Aloha ino oe, eia ihonei paha oe e make ai, +ke ai mainei Pele._" (Compassion great to you! Close here, perhaps, +is your death; Pele comes devouring.) Leaving her, he met his wife, +Kanakawahine, and saluted her. The burning torrent approached, and she +said: "Stay with me here, and let us die together." He said: "No; I go, +I go." He then saluted his two children, Poupoulu and Kaohe, and said, +"_Ke ue nei au ia olua_." (I grieve for you two.) The lava rolled near, +and he ran till a deep chasm arrested his progress. He laid down his +spear and walked over on it in safety. His friend called out for his +help; he held out his spear over the chasm; his companion took hold of +it and he drew him securely over. By this time Pele was coming down +the chasm with accelerated motion. He ran till he reached Kula. Here +he met his sister, Koai, but had only time to say, _"Aloha oe!"_ +(Alas for you!) and then ran on to the shore. His younger brother had +just landed from his fishing-canoe, and had hastened to his house to +provide for the safety of his family, when Kahawali arrived. He and +his friend leaped into the canoe, and with his broad spear paddled +out to sea. Pele, perceiving his escape, ran to the shore and hurled +after him, with prodigious force, great stones and fragments of rock, +which fell thickly around but did not strike his canoe. When he had +paddled a short distance from the shore the _kumukahi_ (east wind) +sprung up. He fixed his broad spear upright in the canoe, that it +might answer the double purpose of mast and sail, and by its aid he +soon reached the island of Maui, where they rested one night and then +proceeded to Lanai. The day following they moved on to Molokai, thence +to Oahu, the abode of Kolonohailaau, his father, and Kanewahinekeaho, +his sister, to whom he related his disastrous perils, and with whom +he took up his permanent abode. + + + + +V + +HIKU AND KAWELU + +_J. S. Emerson_ + + +Not far from the summit of Hualalai, on the island of Hawaii, in +the cave on the southern side of the ridge, lived Hina and her son, +the _kupua_, or demigod, Hiku. All his life long as a child and a +youth, Hiku had lived alone with his mother on this mountain summit, +and had never once been permitted to descend to the plains below to +see the abodes of men and to learn of their ways. From time to time, +his quick ear had caught the sound of the distant _hula_ (drum) and +the voices of the gay merrymakers. Often had he wished to see the +fair forms of those who danced and sang in those far-off cocoanut +groves. But his mother, more experienced in the ways of the world, +had never given her consent. Now, at length, he felt that he was a +man, and as the sounds of mirth arose on his ears, again he asked +his mother to let him go for himself and mingle with the people +on the shore. His mother, seeing that his mind was made up to go, +reluctantly gave her consent and warned him not to stay too long, +but to return in good time. So, taking in his hand his faithful arrow, +_Pua Ne_, which he always carried, he started off. + +This arrow was a sort of talisman, possessed of marvellous powers, +among which were the ability to answer his call and by its flight to +direct his journey. + +Thus he descended over the rough clinker lava and through the groves of +koa that cover the southwestern flank of the mountain, until, nearing +its base, he stood on a distant hill; and consulting his arrow, he shot +it far into the air, watching its bird-like flight until it struck +on a distant hill above Kailua. To this hill he rapidly directed his +steps, and, picking up his arrow in due time, he again shot it into the +air. The second flight landed the arrow near the coast of Holualoa, +some six or eight miles south of Kailua. It struck on a barren waste +of _pahoehoe_, or lava rock, beside the waterhole of _Waikalai_, +known also as the _Wai a Hiku_ (Water of Hiku), where to this day all +the people of that vicinity go to get their water for man and beast. + +Here he quenched his thirst, and nearing the village of Holualoa, again +shot the arrow, which, instinct with life, entered the courtyard of +the _alii_ or chief, of Kona, and from among the women who were there +singled out the fair princess Kawelu, and landed at her feet. Seeing +the noble bearing of Hiku as he approached to claim his arrow, she +stealthily hid it and challenged him to find it. Then Hiku called +to the arrow, "_Pua ne! Pua ne!_" and the arrow replied, "_Ne!_" +thus revealing its hiding-place. + +This exploit with the arrow and the remarkable grace and personal +beauty of the young man quite won the heart of the princess, and she +was soon possessed by a strong passion for him, and determined to +make him her husband. + +With her wily arts she detained him for several days at her home, +and when at last he was about to start for the mountain, she shut +him up in the house and thus detained him by force. But the words +of his mother, warning him not to remain too long, came to his mind, +and he determined to break away from his prison. So he climbed up to +the roof, and removing a portion of the thatch, made his escape. + +When his flight was discovered by Kawelu, the infatuated girl was +distracted with grief. Refusing to be comforted, she tasted no food, +and ere many days had passed was quite dead. Messengers were despatched +who brought back the unhappy Hiku, author of all this sorrow. Bitterly +he wept over the corpse of his beloved, but it was now too late; the +spirit had departed to the nether world, ruled over by Milu. And now, +stung by the reproaches of her kindred and friends for his desertion, +and urged on by his real love for the fair one, he resolved to attempt +the perilous descent into the nether world and, if possible, to bring +her spirit back. + +With the assistance of her friends, he collected from the mountain +slope a great quantity of the _kowali_, or convolvulus vine. He also +prepared a hollow cocoanut shell, splitting it into two closely fitting +parts. Then anointing himself with a mixture of rancid cocoanut and +kukui oil, which gave him a very strong corpse-like odor, he started +with his companions in the well-loaded canoes for a point in the sea +where the sky comes down to meet the water. + +Arrived at the spot, he directed his comrades to lower him into the +abyss called by the Hawaiians the _Lua o Milu_. Taking with him his +cocoanut-shell and seating himself astride of the cross-stick of the +swing, or kowali, he was quickly lowered down by the long rope of +kowali vines held by his friends in the canoe above. + +Soon he entered the great cavern where the shades of the departed were +gathered together. As he came among them, their curiosity was aroused +to learn who he was. And he heard many remarks, such as "Whew! what +an odor this corpse emits!" "He must have been long dead." He had +rather overdone the matter of the rancid oil. Even Milu himself, +as he sat on the bank watching the crowd, was completely deceived by +the stratagem, for otherwise he never would have permitted this bold +descent of a living man into his gloomy abode. + +The Hawaiian swing, it should be remarked, unlike ours, has but one +rope supporting the cross-stick on which the person is seated. Hiku +and his swing attracted considerable attention from the lookers-on. One +shade in particular watched him most intently; it was his sweetheart, +Kawelu. A mutual recognition took place, and with the permission of +Milu she darted up to him and swung with him on the kowali. But even +she had to avert her face on account of his corpse-like odor. As they +were enjoying together this favorite Hawaiian pastime of _lele kowali_, +by a preconcerted signal the friends above were informed of the success +of his ruse and were now rapidly drawing them up. At first she was too +much absorbed in the sport to notice this. When at length her attention +was aroused by seeing the great distance of those beneath her, like +a butterfly she was about to flit away, when the crafty Hiku, who was +ever on the alert, clapped the cocoanut-shells together, imprisoning +her within them, and was then quickly drawn up to the canoes above. + +With their precious burden, they returned to the shores of Holualoa, +where Hiku landed and at once repaired to the house where still lay +the body of his beloved. Kneeling by its side, he made a hole in the +great toe of the left foot, into which with great difficulty he forced +the reluctant spirit, and in spite of its desperate struggles he tied +up the wound so that it could not escape from the cold, clammy flesh +in which it was now imprisoned. Then he began to _lomilomi_, or rub +and chafe the foot, working the spirit further and further up the limb. + +Gradually, as the heart was reached, the blood began once more to flow +through the body, the chest began gently to heave with the breath +of life, and soon the spirit gazed out through the eyes. Kawelu was +now restored to consciousness, and seeing her beloved Hiku bending +tenderly over her, she opened her lips and said: "How could you be +so cruel as to leave me?" + +All remembrance of the Lua o Milu and of her meeting him there had +disappeared, and she took up the thread of consciousness just where she +had left it a few days before at death. Great joy filled the hearts of +the people of Holualoa as they welcomed back to their midst the fair +Kawelu and the hero, Hiku, from whom she was no more to be separated. + + + +LOCATION OF THE LUA O MILU + + +In the myth of Hiku and Kawelu, the entrance to the Lua o Milu +is placed out to sea opposite Holualoa and a few miles south of +Kailua. But the more usual account of the natives is, that it was +situated at the mouth of the great valley of Waipio, in a place called +Keoni, where the sands have long since covered up and concealed from +view this passage from the upper to the nether world. + +Every year, so it is told, the procession of ghosts called by the +natives _Oio_, marches in solemn state down the Mahiki road, and at +this point enters the Lua o Milu. A man, recently living in Waimea, +of the best reputation for veracity, stated that about thirty or more +years ago, he actually saw this ghostly company. He was walking up this +road in the evening, when he saw at a distance the _Oio_ appear, and +knowing that should they encounter him his death would be inevitable, +he discreetly hid himself behind a tree and, trembling with fear, gazed +in silence at the dread spectacle. There was Kamehameha, the conqueror, +with all his chiefs and warriors in military array, thousands of heroes +who had won renown in the olden time. Though all were silent as the +grave, they kept perfect step as they marched along, and passing +through the woods down to Waipio, disappeared from his view. + +In connection with the foregoing, Professor W. D. Alexander kindly +contributes the following: + +"The valley of Waipio is a place frequently celebrated in the songs +and traditions of Hawaii, as having been the abode of Akea and Milu, +the first kings of the island.... + +"Some said that the souls of the departed went to the _Po_ (place +of night), and were annihilated or eaten by the gods there. Others +said that some went to the regions of Akea and Milu. Akea (Wakea), +they said, was the first king of Hawaii. At the expiration of his +reign, which terminated with his life at Waipio, where we then were, +he descended to a region far below, called Kapapahanaumoku (the island +bearing rock or stratum), and founded a kingdom there. Milu, who was +his successor, and reigned in Hamakua, descended, when he died, to +Akea and shared the government of the place with him. Their land is +a place of darkness; their food lizards and butterflies. There are +several streams of water, of which they drink, and some said that +there were large kahilis and wide-spreading kou trees, beneath which +they reclined." [4] + +"They had some very indistinct notion of a future state of happiness +and of misery. They said that, after death, the ghost went first to +the region of Wakea, the name of their first reputed progenitor, and +if it had observed the religious rites and ceremonies, was entertained +and allowed to remain there. That was a place of houses, comforts, +and pleasures. If the soul had failed to be religious, it found no +one there to entertain it, and was forced to take a desperate leap +into a place of misery below, called Milu. + +"There were several precipices, from the verge of which the unhappy +ghosts were supposed to take the leap into the region of woe; three in +particular, one at the northern extremity of Hawaii, one at the western +termination of Maui, and the third at the northern point of Oahu." [5] + +Near the northwest point of Oahu is a rock called Leina Kauhane, where +the souls of the dead descended into Hades. In New Zealand the same +term, "Reinga" (the leaping place), is applied to the North Cape. The +Marquesans have a similar belief in regard to the northermost island +of their group, and apply the same term, "Reinga," to their Avernus. + + + + + +VI + +LONOPUHA; OR, ORIGIN OF THE ART OF HEALING IN HAWAII + +_Translated by Thos. G. Thrum_ + + +During the time that Milu was residing at Waipio, Hawaii, the year +of which is unknown, there came to these shores a number of people, +with their wives, from that vague foreign land, Kahiki. But they were +all of godly kind (_ano akua nae_), it is said, and drew attention +as they journeyed from place to place. They arrived first at Niihau, +and from there they travelled through all the islands. At Hawaii +they landed at the south side, thence to Puna, Hilo, and settled at +Kukuihaele, Hamakua, just above Waipio. + +On every island they visited there appeared various diseases, and +many deaths resulted, so that it was said this was their doings, +among the chiefs and people. The diseases that followed in their +train were chills, fevers, headache, _pani_, and so on. + +These are the names of some of these people: Kaalaenuiahina, +Kahuilaokalani, Kaneikaulanaula, besides others. They brought +death, but one Kamakanuiahailono followed after them with healing +powers. This was perhaps the origin of sickness and the art of healing +with medicines in Hawaii. + +As has been said, diseases settled on the different islands like an +epidemic, and the practice of medicine ensued, for Kamakanuiahailono +followed them in their journeyings. He arrived at Kau, stopping at +Kiolakaa, on the west side of Waiohinu, where a great multitude of +people were residing, and Lono was their chief. The stranger sat on a +certain hill, where many of the people visited him, for the reason that +he was a newcomer, a custom that is continued to this day. While there +he noticed the redness of skin of a certain one of them, and remarked, +"Oh, the redness of skin of that man!" + +The people replied, "Oh, that is Lono, the chief of this land, and +he is a farmer." + +He again spoke, asserting that his sickness was very great; for +through the redness of the skin he knew him to be a sick man. + +They again replied that he was a healthy man, "but you consider him +very sick." He then left the residents and set out on his journey. + +Some of those who heard his remarks ran and told the chief the +strange words, "that he was a very sick man." On hearing this, +Lono raised up his _oo_ (digger) and said, "Here I am, without any +sign of disease, and yet I am sick." And as he brought down his _oo_ +with considerable force, it struck his foot and pierced it through, +causing the blood to flow freely, so that he fell and fainted away. At +this, one of the men seized a pig and ran after the stranger, who, +hearing the pig squealing, looked behind him and saw the man running +with it; and as he neared him he dropped it before him, and told him +of Lono's misfortune, Kamakanuiahailono then returned, gathering on +the way the young popolo seeds and its tender leaves in his garment +(_kihei_). When he arrived at the place where the wounded man was +lying he asked for some salt, which he took and pounded together with +the popolo and placed it with a cocoanut covering on the wound. From +then till night the flowing of the blood ceased. After two or three +weeks had elapsed he again took his departure. + +While he was leisurely journeying, some one breathing heavily +approached him in the rear, and, turning around, there was the chief, +and he asked him: "What is it, Lono, and where are you going?" + +Lono replied, "You healed me; therefore, as soon as you had departed I +immediately consulted with my successors, and have resigned my offices +to them, so that they will have control over all. As for myself, +I followed after you, that you might teach me the art of healing." + +The _kahuna lapaau_ (medical priest) then said, "Open your mouth." When +Lono opened his mouth, the kahuna spat into it, [6] by which he +would become proficient in the calling he had chosen, and in which +he eventually became, in fact, very skilful. + +As they travelled, he instructed Lono (on account of the accident +to his foot he was called Lonopuha) in the various diseases, and the +different medicines for the proper treatment of each. They journeyed +through Kau, Puna, and Hilo, thence onward to Hamakua as far as +Kukuihaele. Prior to their arrival there, Kamakanuiahailono said +to Lonopuha, "It is better that we reside apart, lest your healing +practice do not succeed; but you settle elsewhere, so as to gain +recognition from your own skill." + +For this reason, Lonopuha went on farther and located in Waimanu, +and there practised the art of healing. On account of his labors here, +he became famous as a skilful healer, which fame Kamakanuiahailono and +others heard of at Kukuihaele; but he never revealed to _Kaalaenuiahina +ma_ (company) of his teaching of Lonopuha, through which he became +celebrated. It so happened that _Kaalaenuiahina ma_ were seeking an +occasion to cause Milu's death, and he was becoming sickly through +their evil efforts. + +When Milu heard of the fame of Lonopuha as a skilful healer, because +of those who were afflicted with disease and would have died but for +his treatment, he sent his messenger after him. On arriving at Milu's +house, Lonopuha examined and felt of him, and then said, "You will +have no sickness, provided you be obedient to my teachings." He then +exercised his art, and under his medical treatment Milu recovered. + +Lonopuha then said to him: "I have treated you, and you are well of +the internal ailments you suffered under, and only that from without +remains. Now, you must build a house of leaves and dwell therein in +quietness for a few weeks, to recuperate." These houses are called +_pipipi_, such being the place to which invalids are moved for +convalescent treatment unless something unforeseen should occur. + +Upon Milu's removal thereto, Lonopuha advised him as follows: "O +King! you are to dwell in this house according to the length of time +directed, in perfect quietness; and should the excitement of sports +with attendant loud cheering prevail here, I warn you against these +as omens of evil for your death; and I advise you not to loosen the +_ti_ leaves of your house to peep out to see the cause, for on the +very day you do so, that day you will perish." + +Some two weeks had scarcely passed since the King had been confined +in accordance with the kahuna's instructions, when noises from +various directions in proximity to the King's dwelling were heard, +but he regarded the advice of the priest all that day. The cause of +the commotion was the appearance of two birds playing in the air, +which so excited the people that they kept cheering them all that day. + +Three weeks had almost passed when loud cheering was again heard in +Waipio, caused by a large bird decorated with very beautiful feathers, +which flew out from the clouds and soared proudly over the _palis_ +(precipices) of Koaekea and Kaholokuaiwa, and poised gracefully +over the people; therefore, they cheered as they pursued it here and +there. Milu was much worried thereby, and became so impatient that +he could no longer regard the priest's caution; so he lifted some of +the ti leaves of his house to look out at the bird, when instantly +it made a thrust at him, striking him under the armpit, whereby his +life was taken and he was dead (_lilo ai kona ola a make iho la_). + +The priest saw the bird flying with the liver of Milu; therefore, he +followed after it. When it saw that it was pursued, it immediately +entered into a sunken rock just above the base of the precipice of +Koaekea. As he reached the place, the blood was spattered around +where the bird had entered. Taking a piece of garment (_pahoola_), he +soaked it with the blood and returned and placed it in the opening in +the body of the dead King and poured healing medicine on the wound, +whereby Milu recovered. And the place where the bird entered with +Milu's liver has ever since been called Keakeomilu (the liver of Milu). + +A long while afterward, when this death of the King was as nothing +(_i mea ole_), and he recovered as formerly, the priest refrained +not from warning him, saying: "You have escaped from this death; +there remains for you one other." + +After Milu became convalescent from his recent serious experience, +a few months perhaps had elapsed, when the surf at Waipio became very +high and was breaking heavily on the beach. This naturally caused +much commotion and excitement among the people, as the numerous +surf-riders, participating in the sport, would land upon the beach +on their surf-boards. Continuous cheering prevailed, and the hilarity +rendered Milu so impatient at the restraint put upon him by the priest +that he forsook his wise counsel and joined in the exhilarating sport. + +Seizing a surf-board he swam out some distance to the selected spot +for suitable surfs. Here he let the first and second combers pass +him; but watching his opportunity he started with the momentum of the +heavier third comber, catching the crest just right. Quartering on +the rear of his board, he rode in with majestic swiftness, and landed +nicely on the beach amid the cheers and shouts of the people. He then +repeated the venture and was riding in as successfully, when, in a +moment of careless abandon, at the place where the surfs finish as +they break on the beach, he was thrust under and suddenly disappeared, +while the surf-board flew from under and was thrown violently upon the +shore. The people in amazement beheld the event, and wildly exclaimed: +"Alas! Milu is dead! Milu is dead!" With sad wonderment they searched +and watched in vain for his body. Thus was seen the result of repeated +disobedience. + + + + + +VII + +A VISIT TO THE SPIRIT LAND; OR, THE STRANGE EXPERIENCE OF A WOMAN IN +KONA, HAWAII + +_Mrs. E. N. Haley_ + + +Kalima had been sick for many weeks, and at last died. Her friends +gathered around her with loud cries of grief, and with many expressions +of affection and sorrow at their loss they prepared her body for +its burial. + +The grave was dug, and when everything was ready for the last rites +and sad act, husband and friends came to take a final look at the rigid +form and ashen face before it was laid away forever in the ground. The +old mother sat on the mat-covered ground beside her child, brushing +away the intrusive flies with a piece of cocoanut-leaf, and wiping +away the tears that slowly rolled down her cheeks. Now and then she +would break into a low, heart-rending wail, and tell in a sob-choked, +broken voice, how good this her child had always been to her, how her +husband loved her, and how her children would never have any one to +take her place. "Oh, why," she cried, "did the gods leave me? I am old +and heavy with years; my back is bent and my eyes are getting dark. I +cannot work, and am too old and weak to enjoy fishing in the sea, +or dancing and feasting under the trees. But this my child loved all +these things, and was so happy. Why is she taken and I, so useless, +left?" And again that mournful, sob-choked wail broke on the still +air, and was borne out to the friends gathered under the trees before +the door, and was taken up and repeated until the hardest heart would +have softened and melted at the sound. As they sat around on the mats +looking at their dead and listening to the old mother, suddenly Kalima +moved, took a long breath, and opened her eyes. They were frightened +at the miracle, but so happy to have her back again among them. + +The old mother raised her hands and eyes to heaven and, with rapt +faith on her brown, wrinkled face, exclaimed: "The gods have let her +come back! How they must love her!" + +Mother, husband, and friends gathered around and rubbed her hands +and feet, and did what they could for her comfort. In a few minutes +she revived enough to say, "I have something strange to tell you." + +Several days passed before she was strong enough to say more; then +calling her relatives and friends about her, she told them the +following weird and strange story: + +"I died, as you know. I seemed to leave my body and stand beside it, +looking down on what _was_ me. The me that was standing there looked +like the form I was looking at, only, I was alive and the other was +dead. I gazed at my body for a few minutes, then turned and walked +away. I left the house and village, and walked on and on to the next +village, and there I found crowds of people,--Oh, so many people! The +place which I knew as a small village of a few houses was a very +large place, with hundreds of houses and thousands of men, women, +and children. Some of them I knew and they spoke to me,--although +that seemed strange, for I knew they were dead,--but nearly all were +strangers. They were all so happy! They seemed not to have a care; +nothing to trouble them. Joy was in every face, and happy laughter +and bright, loving words were on every tongue. + +"I left that village and walked on to the next. I was not tired, for +it seemed no trouble to walk. It was the same there; thousands of +people, and every one so joyous and happy. Some of these I knew. I +spoke to a few people, then went on again. I seemed to be on my way +to the volcano,--to Pele's pit,--and could not stop, much as I wanted +to do so. + +"All along the road were houses and people, where I had never known +any one to live. Every bit of good ground had many houses, and many, +many happy people on it. I felt so full of joy, too, that my heart +sang within me, and I was glad to be dead. + +"In time I came to South Point, and there, too, was a great crowd +of people. The barren point was a great village, I was greeted with +happy _alohas_, then passed on. All through Kau it was the same, and +I felt happier every minute. At last I reached the volcano. There +were some people there, but not so many as at other places. They, +too, were happy like the others, but they said, 'You must go back to +your body. You are not to die yet.' + +"I did not want to go back. I begged and prayed to be allowed to stay +with them, but they said, 'No, you must go back; and if you do not +go willingly, we will make you go.' + +"I cried and tried to stay, but they drove me back, even beating me +when I stopped and would not go on. So I was driven over the road +I had come, back through all those happy people. They were still +joyous and happy, but when they saw that I was not allowed to stay, +they turned on me and helped drive me, too. + +"Over the sixty miles I went, weeping, followed by those cruel people, +till I reached my home and stood by my body again. I looked at it and +hated it. Was that my body? What a horrid, loathsome thing it was to +me now, since I had seen so many beautiful, happy creatures! Must I go +and live in that thing again? No, I would not go into it; I rebelled +and cried for mercy. + +"'You must go into it; we will make you!' said my tormentors. They +took me and pushed me head foremost into the big toe. + +"I struggled and fought, but could not help myself. They pushed and +beat me again, when I tried for the last time to escape. When I passed +the waist, I seemed to know it was of no use to struggle any more, +so went the rest of the way myself. Then my body came to life again, +and I opened my eyes. + +"But I wish I could have stayed with those happy people. It was cruel +to make me come back. My other body was so beautiful, and I was so +happy, so happy!" + + + + +VIII + +KAPEEPEEKAUILA; OR, THE ROCKS OF KANA + +_Rev. A. O. Forbes_ + + +On the northern side of the island of Molokai, commencing at the +eastern end and stretching along a distance of about twenty miles, +the coast is a sheer precipice of black rock varying in height from +eight hundred to two thousand feet. The only interruptions to the +continuity of this vast sea wall are formed by the four romantic +valleys of Pelekunu, Puaahaunui, Wailau, and Waikolu. Between the +valleys of Pelekunu and Waikolu, juts out the bold, sharp headland +of Haupu, forming the dividing ridge between them, and reminding one +somewhat of an axe-head turned edge upward. Directly in a line with +this headland, thirty or forty rods out in the ocean, arise abruptly +from the deep blue waters the rocks of Haupu, three or four sharp, +needle-like points of rock varying from twenty to one hundred feet in +height. This is the spot associated with the legend of Kapeepeekauila, +and these rocks stand like grim sentinels on duty at the eastern +limit of what is now known as the settlement of Kalawao. The legend +runs as follows: + +Keahole was the father, Hiiaka-noholae was the mother, and +Kapeepeekauila was the son. This Kapeepeekauila was a hairy man, +and dwelt on the ridge of Haupu. + +Once on a time Hakalanileo and his wife Hina, the mother of Kana, +came and dwelt in the valley of Pelekunu, on the eastern side of the +ridge of Haupu. + +Kapeepeekauila, hearing of the arrival of Hina, the beautiful daughter +of Kalahiki, sent his children to fetch her. They went and said to +Hina, "Our royal father desires you as his wife, and we have come +for you." + +"Desires me for what?" said she. + +"Desires you for a wife," said they. + +This announcement pleased the beautiful daughter of Kalahiki, and +she replied, "Return to your royal father and tell him he shall be +the husband and I will be the wife." + +When this message was delivered to Kapeepeekauila, he immediately +sent a messenger to the other side of the island to summon all the +people from Keonekuina to Kalamaula; for we have already seen that +he was a hairy man, and it was necessary that this blemish should be +removed. Accordingly, when the people had all arrived, Kapeepeekauila +laid himself down and they fell to work until the hairs were all +plucked out. He then took Hina to wife, and they two dwelt together +on the top of Haupu. + +Poor Hakalanileo, the husband of Hina, mourned the loss of his +companion of the long nights of winter and the shower-sprinkled +nights of summer. Neither could he regain possession of her, for +the ridge of Haupu grew till it reached the heavens. He mourned and +rolled himself in the dust in agony, and crossed his hands behind his +back. He went from place to place in search of some powerful person +who should be able to restore to him his wife. In his wanderings, +the first person to whom he applied was Kamalalawalu, celebrated for +strength and courage. This man, seeing his doleful plight, asked, +"Why these tears, O my father?" + +Hakalanileo replied, "Thy mother is lost." + +"Lost to whom?" + +"Lost to Kapeepee." + +"What Kapeepee?" + +"Kapeepee-kauila." + +"What Kauila?" + +"Kauila, the dauntless, of Haupu." + +"Then, O father, thou wilt not recover thy wife. Our stick may strike; +it will but hit the dust at his feet. His stick, when it strikes back, +will hit the head. Behold, measureless is the height of Haupu." + +Now, this Kamalalawalu was celebrated for his strength in throwing +stones. Of himself, one side was stone, and the other flesh. As +a test he seized a large stone and threw it upwards. It rose till +it hit the sky and then fell back to earth again. As it came down, +he turned his stony side toward it, and the collision made his side +rattle. Hakalanileo looked on and sadly said, "Not strong enough." + +On he went, beating his breast in his grief, till he came to the +celebrated Niuloihiki. Question and answer passed between them, as +in the former case, but Niuloihiki replied, "It is hopeless; behold, +measureless is the height of Haupu." + +Again he prosecuted his search till he met the third man of fame, +whose name was Kaulu. Question and answer passed, as before, and +Kaulu, to show his strength, seized a river and held it fast in its +course. But Hakalanileo mournfully said, "Not strong enough." + +Pursuing his way with streaming eyes, he came to the fourth hero, +Lonokaeho by name. As in the former cases, so in this, he received +no satisfaction. These four were all he knew of who were foremost in +prowess, and all four had failed him. It was the end, and he turned +sadly toward the mountain forest, to return to his home. + +Meantime, the rumor had reached the ears of Niheu, surnamed "the +Rogue." Some one told him a father had passed along searching for +some one able to recover him his wife. + +"Where is this father of mine?" inquired Niheu. + +"He has gone inland," was the reply. + +"I'll overtake him; he won't escape me," said Niheu. So he went after +the old man, kicking over the trees that came in his way. The old man +had gone on till he was tired and faint, when Niheu overtook him and +brought him back to his house. Then Niheu asked him, "What made you +go on without coming to the house of Niheu?" + +"What, indeed," answered the old man; "as though I were not seeking +to recover thy mother, who is lost!" + +Then came question and answer, as in former cases, and Niheu said, +"I fear thou wilt not recover thy wife, O my father. But let us go +inland to the foster son of Uli." So they went. But Niheu ran on ahead +and told Kana, the foster son of Uli: "Behold, here comes Hakalanileo, +bereft of his wife. We are all beat." + +"Where is he?" inquired Kana. + +"Here he is, just arrived." + +Kana looked forth, and Hakalanileo recoiled with fear at the blazing +of his eyes. + +Then spoke Niheu: "Why could you not wait before looking at our +father? Behold, you have frightened him, and he has run back." + +On this, Kana, remaining yet in the house, stretched forth his hand, +and, grasping the old man in the distance, brought him back and sat +him on his lap. Then Kana wept. And the impudent Niheu said, "Now +you are crying; look out for the old man, or he will get water-soaked." + +But Kana ordered Niheu to bestir himself and light a fire, for the +tears of Kana were as the big dropping rains of winter, soaking the +plain. And Kana said to the old man, "Now, dry yourself by the fire, +and when you are warm, tell your story." + +The old man obeyed, and when he was warm enough, told the story of +his grief. Then said Kana, "Almost spent are my years; I am only +waiting for death, and behold I have at last found a foeman worthy +of my prowess." + +Kana immediately espoused the cause of Hakalanileo, and ordered his +younger brother, Niheu, to construct a canoe for the voyage. Poor +Niheu worked and toiled without success until, in despair, he +exclaimed, upbraidingly, "Thy work is not work; it is slavery. There +thou dwellest at thy ease in thy retreat, while with thy foot thou +destroyest my canoe." + +Upon this, Kana pointed out to Niheu a bush, and said, "Can you pull +up that bush?" + +"Yes," replied Niheu, for it was but a small bush, and he doubted not +his ability to root it up; so he pulled and tugged away, but could +not loosen it. + +Kana looking on, said, tauntingly, "Your foeman will not be overcome +by you." + +Then Kana stretched forth his hands, scratching among the forests, +and soon had a canoe in one hand; a little more and another +canoe appeared in the other hand. The twin canoes were named +_Kaumueli_. He lifted them down to the shore, provided them with +paddles, and then appointed fourteen rowers. Kana embarked with his +magic rod called _Waka-i-lani_. Thus they set forth to wage war upon +Kapeepeekauila. They went on until the canoes grounded on a hard ledge. + +Niheu called out, "Behold, thou sleepest, O Kana, while we all perish." + +Kana replied, "What is there to destroy us? Are not these the reefs +of Haupu? Away with the ledges, the rock points, and the yawning +chasms! Smite with _Waka-i-lani_, thy rod." + +Niheu smote, the rocks crumbled to pieces, and the canoes were +freed. They pursued their course again until Niheu, being on the watch, +cried out, "Why sleepest thou, O Kana? Here we perish, again. Thy +like for sleeping I never saw!" + +"Wherefore perish?" said Kana. + +"Behold," replied Niheu, "the fearful wall of water. If we attempt +to pass it, it will topple over and destroy us all." + +Then said Kana: "Behold, behind us the reefs of Haupu. That is the +destruction passed. As for the destruction before us, smite with +thy rod." + +Niheu smote, the wall of water divided, and the canoes passed safely +through. Then they went on their course again, as before. After a +time, Niheu again called out, "Alas, again we perish. Here comes a +great monster. If he falls upon us, we are all dead men." + +And Kana said, "Look sharp, now, and when the pointed snout crosses +our bow, smite with thy rod." + +And he did so, and behold, this great thing was a monster fish, and +when brought on board it became food for them all. So wonderfully +great was this fish that its weight brought the rim of the canoes +down to the water's edge. + +They continued on their way, and next saw the open mouth of the +sharp-toothed shark--another of the outer defences of Haupu--awaiting +them. + +"Smite with thy rod," ordered Kana. + +Niheu smote, and the shark died. + +Next they came upon the great turtle, another defence of Haupu. Again +the sleepy Kana is aroused by the cry of the watchful Niheu, and +the turtle is slain by the stroke of the magic rod. All this was +during the night. At last, just as the edge of the morning lifted +itself from the deep, their mast became entangled in the branches of +the trees. Niheu flung upward a stone. It struck. The branches came +rattling down, and the mast was free. On they went till the canoes +gently stood still. On this, Niheu cried out, "Here you are, asleep +again, O Kana, and the canoes are aground!" + +Kana felt beneath; there was no ground. He felt above; the mast +was entangled in weeds. He pulled, and the weeds and earth came down +together. The smell of the fresh-torn weeds was wafted up to Hale-huki, +the house where Kapeepeekauila lived. His people, on the top of Haupu, +looked down on the canoes floating at the foot. "Wondrous is the size +of the canoes!" they cried. "Ah! it is a load of _opihis_ (shell-fish) +from Hawaii for Hina," for that was a favorite dish with her. + +Meantime, Kana despatched Niheu after his mother. "Go in friendly +fashion," said the former. + +Niheu leaped ashore, but slipped and fell on the smooth rocks. Back +he went to the canoes. + +"What sort of a coming back is this?" demanded Kana. + +"I slipped and fell, and just escaped with my life," answered Niheu. + +"Back with you!" thundered Kana. + +Again the luckless Niheu sprang ashore, but the long-eyed sand-crabs +(_ohiki-makaloa_) made the sand fly with their scratching till his +eyes were filled. Back to the canoes again he went. "Got it all in +my eyes!" said he, and he washed them out with sea-water. + +"You fool!" shouted Kana; "what were you looking down for? The +sand-crabs are not birds. If you had been looking up, as you ought, +you would not have got the sand in your eyes. Go again!" + +This time he succeeded, and climbed to the top of Haupu. Arriving at +the house, Hale-huki, where Hina dwelt, he entered at once. Being asked +"Why enterest thou this forbidden door?" he replied: + +"Because I saw thee entering by this door. Hadst thou entered some +other way, I should not have come in at the door." And behold, +Kapeepeekauila and Hina sat before him. Then Niheu seized the hand +of Hina and said, "Let us two go." And she arose and went. + +When they had gone about half-way to the brink of the precipice, +Kapeepeekauila exclaimed, "What is this? Is the woman gone?" + +Mo-i, the sister of Kana, answered and said, "If you wish the woman, +now is the time; you and I fight." + +Great was the love of Kapeepeekauila for Hina, and he said, "No +war dare touch Haupu; behold, it is a hill, growing even to the +heavens." And he sent the _kolea_ (plover) squad to desecrate the +sacred locks of Niheu; for the locks of Niheu were _kapu_, and if +they should be touched, he would relinquish Hina for very shame. So +the kolea company sailed along in the air till they brushed against +the sacred locks of Niheu, and for very shame he let go his mother +and struck at the koleas with his rod and hit their tail feathers and +knocked them all out, so that they remain tailless to this day. And +he returned to the edge of the shore, while the koleas bore off Hina +in triumph. + +When Niheu reached the shore, he beat his forehead with stones till +the blood flowed; a trick which Kana perceived from on board the +canoes. And when Niheu went on board he said, "See! we fought and I +got my head hurt." + +But Kana replied, "There was no fight; you did it yourself, out of +shame at your defeat." + +And Niheu replied, "What, then, shall we fight?" + +"Yes," said Kana, and he stood up. + +Now, one of his legs was named Keauea and the other Kaipanea, and as +he stood upon the canoes, he began to lengthen himself upward until +the dwellers on top of Haupu exclaimed in terror, "We are all dead +men! Behold, here is a great giant towering above us." + +And Kapeepeekauila, seeing this, hastened to prune the branches of +the kamani tree (_Calophyllum inophyllum_), so that the bluff should +grow upward. And the bluff rose, and Kana grew. Thus they strove, +the bluff rising higher and Kana growing taller, until he became +as the stalk of a banana leaf, and gradually spun himself out till +he was no thicker than a strand of a spider's web, and at last he +yielded the victory to Kapeepeekauila. + +Niheu, seeing the defeat of Kana, called out, "Lay yourself along to +Kona, on Hawaii, to your grandmother, Uli." + +And he laid himself along with his body in Kona, while his feet rested +on Molokai. His grandmother in Kona fed him until he became plump and +fat again. Meanwhile, poor Niheu, watching at his feet on Molokai, +saw their sides fill out with flesh while he was almost starved with +hunger. "So, then," quoth he, "you are eating and growing fat while +I die with hunger." And he cut off one of Kana's feet for revenge. + +The sensation crept along up to his body, which lay in Kona, and Kana +said to his grandmother, Uli, "I seem to feel a numbness creeping +over me." + +And she answered, and said, "Thy younger brother is hungry with +watching, and seeing thy feet grow plump, he has cut off one of them; +therefore this numbness." + +Kana, having at last grown strong and fat, prepared to wage war again +upon Kapeepeekauila. Food was collected in abundance from Waipio, and +when it was prepared, they embarked again in their canoes and came +back to Haupu, on Molokai. But his grandmother, Uli, had previously +instructed him to first destroy all the branches of the kamani tree +of Haupu. Then he showed himself, and began again to stretch upward +and tower above the bluff. Kapeepeekauila hastened again to trim +the branches of the kamani, that the bluff might grow as before; +but behold, they were all gone! It was the end; Kapeepeekauila was +at last vanquished. The victorious Kana recovered his sister, Mo-i, +restored to poor Hakalanileo his wife, Hina, and then, tearing down +the bluff of Haupu, kicked off large portions of it into the sea, +where they stand to this day, and are called "The Rocks of Kana." + + + + +IX + +KALELEALUAKA + +_Dr. N. B. Emerson_ + + + +PART I + + +Kaopele was born in Waipio, Hawaii. When born he did not breathe, and +his parents were greatly troubled; but they washed his body clean, +and having arrayed it in good clothes, they watched anxiously over +the body for several days, and then, concluding it to be dead, placed +it in a small cave in the face of the cliff. There the body remained +from the summer month of _Ikiki_ (July or August) to the winter month +of _Ikua_ (December or January), a period of six months. + +At this time they were startled by a violent storm of thunder and +lightning, and the rumbling of an earthquake. At the same time appeared +the marvellous phenomenon of eight rainbows arching over the mouth +of the cave. Above the din of the storm the parents heard the voice +of the awakened child calling to them: + + + "Let your love rest upon me, + O my parents, who have thrust me forth, + Who have left me in the cavernous cliff, + Who have heartlessly placed me in the + Cliff frequented by the tropic bird! + O Waiaalaia, my mother! + O Waimanu, my father! + Come and take me!" + + +The yearning love of the mother earnestly besought the father to go +in quest of the infant; but he protested that search was useless, +as the child was long since dead. But, unable longer to endure a +woman's teasing, which is the same in all ages, he finally set forth +in high dudgeon, vowing that in case of failure he would punish her +on his return. + +On reaching the place where the babe had been deposited, its body was +not to be found. But lifting up his eyes and looking about, he espied +the child perched on a tree, braiding a wreath from the scarlet flowers +of the _lehua_ (_Metrosideros polymorpha_). "I have come to take you +home with me," said the father. But the infant made no answer. The +mother received the child to her arms with demonstrations of the +liveliest affection. At her suggestion they named the boy Kaopele, +from the name of their goddess, Pele. + +Six months after this, on the first day (_Hilo_) of the new moon, in +the month of Ikiki, they returned home from working in the fields and +found the child lying without breath, apparently dead. After venting +their grief for their darling in loud lamentations, they erected a +frame to receive its dead body. + +Time healed the wounds of their affection, and after the lapse of six +moons they had ceased to mourn, when suddenly they were affrighted +by a storm of thunder and lightning, with a quaking of the earth, +in the midst of which they distinguished the cry of their child, +"Oh, come; come and take me!" + +They, overjoyed at this second restoration of their child to them, +and deeming it to be a miracle worked by their goddess, made up their +minds that if it again fell into a trance they would not be anxious, +since their goddess would awake their child and bring it to life again. + +But afterward the child informed them of their mistake, saying: +"This marvel that you see in me is a trance; when I pass into my deep +sleep my spirit at once floats away in the upper air with the goddess, +Poliahu. We are a numerous band of spirits, but I excel them in the +distance of my flights. In one day I can compass this island of Hawaii, +as well as Maui, Oahu, and Kauai, and return again. In my flights I +have seen that Kauai is the richest of all the islands, for it is well +supplied with food and fish, and it is abundantly watered. I intend +to remain with you until I am grown; then I shall journey to Kauai +and there spend the rest of my life." Thus Kaopele lived with his +parents until he was grown, but his habit of trance still clung to him. + +Then one day he filled them with grief by saying: "I am going, aloha." + +They sealed their love for each other with tears and kisses, and he +slept and was gone. He alighted at Kula, on Maui. There he engaged +in cultivating food. When his crops were nearly ripe and ready to be +eaten he again fell into his customary deep sleep, and when he awoke +he found that the people of the land had eaten up all his crops. + +Then he flew away to a place called Kapapakolea, in Moanalua, on Oahu, +where he set out a new plantation. Here the same fortune befell him, +and his time for sleep came upon him before his crops were fit for +eating. When he awoke, his plantation had gone to waste. + +Again he moves on, and this time settles in Lihue, Oahu, where for +the third time he sets out a plantation of food, but is prevented +from eating it by another interval of sleep. Awakening, he finds his +crops overripe and wasted by neglect and decay. + +His restless ambition now carries him to Lahuimalo, still on the +island of Oahu, where his industry plants another crop of food. Six +months pass, and he is about to eat of the fruits of his labor, +when one day, on plunging into the river to bathe, he falls into +his customary trance, and his lifeless body is floated by the stream +out into the ocean and finally cast up by the waters on the sands of +Maeaea, a place in Waialua, Oahu. + +At the same time there arrived a man from Kauai in search of a human +body to offer as a sacrifice at the temple of Kahikihaunaka at Wailua, +on Kauai, and having seen the corpse of Kaopele on the beach, he asks +and obtains permission of the feudal lord (_Konohiki_) of Waialua +to take it. Thus it happens that Kaopele is taken by canoe to the +island of Kauai and placed, along with the corpse of another man, +on the altar of the temple at Wailua. + +There he lay until the bones of his fellow corpse had begun to fall +apart. When six moons had been accomplished, at midnight there came a +burst of thunder and an earthquake. Kaopele came to life, descended +from the altar, and directed his steps toward a light which he saw +shining through some chinks in a neighboring house. He was received +by the occupants of the house with that instant and hearty hospitality +which marks the Hawaiian race, and bidden to enter ("_mai, komo mai_"). + +Food was set before him, with which he refreshed himself. The old +man who seemed to be the head of the household was so much pleased +and impressed with the bearing and appearance of our hero that he +forthwith sought to secure him to be the husband of his granddaughter, +a beautiful girl named Makalani. Without further ado, he persuaded +him to be a suitor for the hand of the girl, and while it was yet +night, started off to obtain the girl's consent and to bring her back +with him. + +The young woman was awakened from her slumbers in the night to hear the +proposition of her grandfather, who painted to her in glowing colors +the manly attractions of her suitor. The suit found favor in the eyes +of the girl's parents and she herself was nothing loath; but with +commendable maidenly propriety she insisted that her suitor should be +brought and presented to her, and that she should not first seek him. + +The sun had hardly begun to lift the dew from the grass when our +young hero, accompanied by the two matchmakers, was brought into the +presence of his future wife. They found favor in each other's eyes, +and an ardent attachment sprang up on the instant. Matters sped +apace. A separate house was assigned as the residence of the young +couple, and their married life began felicitously. + +But the instincts of a farmer were even stronger in the breast of +Kaopele than the bonds of matrimony. In the middle of the night he +arose, and, leaving the sleeping form of his bride, passed out into the +darkness. He went _mauka_ until he came upon an extensive upland plain, +where he set to work clearing and making ready for planting. This done, +he collected from various quarters shoots and roots of potato (_kalo_), +banana (_waoke_), _awa_, and other plants, and before day the whole +plain was a plantation. After his departure his wife awoke with a +start and found her husband was gone. She went into the next house, +where her parents were sleeping, and, waking them, made known her loss; +but they knew nothing of his whereabouts. Much perplexed, they were +still debating the cause of his departure, when he suddenly returned, +and to his wife's questioning, answered that he had been at work. + +She gently reproved him for interrupting their bridal night with +agriculture, and told him there would be time enough for that when they +had lived together a while and had completed their honeymoon. "And +besides," said she, "if you wish to turn your hand to agriculture, +here is the plat of ground at hand in which my father works, and you +need not go up to that plain where only wild hogs roam." + +To this he replied: "My hand constrains me to plant; I crave work; +does idleness bring in anything? There is profit only when a man turns +the palm of his hand to the soil: that brings in food for family and +friends. If one were indeed the son of a king he could sleep until +the sun was high in the heavens, and then rise and find the bundles +of cooked food ready for him. But for a plain man, the only thing +to do is to cultivate the soil and plant, and when he returns from +his work let him light his oven, and when the food is cooked let the +husband and the wife crouch about the hearth and eat together." + +Again, very early on the following morning, while his wife slept, +Kaopele rose, and going to the house of a neighbor, borrowed a fishhook +with its tackle. Then, supplying himself with bait, he went a-fishing +in the ocean and took an enormous quantity of fish. On his way home +he stopped at the house where he had borrowed the tackle and returned +it, giving the man also half of the fish. Arrived at home, he threw +the load of fish onto the ground with a thud which waked his wife +and parents. + +"So you have been a-fishing," said his wife. "Thinking you had again +gone to work in the field, I went up there, but you were not there. But +what an immense plantation you have set out! Why, the whole plain +is covered." + +His father-in-law said, "A fine lot of fish, my boy." + +Thus went life with them until the crops were ripe, when one day +Kaopele said to his wife, who was now evidently with child, "If the +child to be born is a boy, name it Kalelealuaka; but if it be a girl, +name it as you will, from your side of the family." + +From his manner she felt uneasy and suspicious of him, and said, +"Alas! do you intend to desert me?" + +Then Kaopele explained to his wife that he was not really going to +leave her, as men are wont to forsake their wives, but he foresaw +that that was soon to happen which was habitual to him, and he felt +that on the night of the morrow a deep sleep would fall upon him +(_puni ka hiamoe_), which would last for six months. Therefore, +she was not to fear. + +"Do not cast me out nor bury me in the ground," said he. Then he +explained to her how he happened to be taken from Oahu to Kauai and how +he came to be her husband, and he commanded her to listen attentively +to him and to obey him implicitly. Then they pledged their love to +each other, talking and not sleeping all that night. + +On the following day all the friends and neighbors assembled, and as +they sat about, remarks were made among them in an undertone, like +this, "So this is the man who was placed on the altar of the _heiau_ +at Wailua." And as evening fell he bade them all _aloha_, and said +that he should be separated from them for six months, but that his +body would remain with them if they obeyed his commands. And, having +kissed his wife, he fell into the dreamful, sacred sleep of Niolo-kapu. + +On the sixth day the father-in-law said: "Let us bury your husband, +lest he stink. I thought it was to be only a natural sleep, but it +is ordinary death. Look, his body is rigid, his flesh is cold, and +he does not breathe; these are the signs of death." + +But Makalani protested, "I will not let him be buried; let him lie +here, and I will watch over him as he commanded; you also heard his +words." But in spite of the wife's earnest protests, the hard-hearted +father-in-law gathered strong vines of the _koali_ (convolvulus), +tied them about Kaopele's feet, and attaching to them heavy stones, +caused his body to be conveyed in a canoe and sunk in the dark waters +of the ocean midway between Kauai and Oahu. + +Makalani lived in sorrow for her husband until the birth of her child, +and as it was a boy, she called his name Kalelealuaka. + + + +PART II + + +When the child was about two months old the sky became overcast and +there came up a mighty storm, with lightning and an earthquake. Kaopele +awoke in his dark, watery couch, unbound the cords that held his feet, +and by three powerful strokes raised himself to the surface of the +water. He looked toward Kauai and Oahu, but love for his wife and +child prevailed and drew him to Kauai. + +In the darkness of night he stood by his wife's bed and, feeling +for her, touched her forehead with his clammy hand. She awoke with +a start, and on his making himself known she screamed with fright, +"Ghost of Kaopele!" and ran to her parents. Not until a candle was +lighted would she believe it to be her husband. The step-parents, +in fear and shame at their heartless conduct, fled away, and never +returned. From this time forth Kaopele was never again visited by a +trance; his virtue had gone out from him to the boy Kalelealuaka. + +When Kalelealuaka was ten years old Kaopele began to train the +lad in athletic sports and to teach him all the arts of war and +combat practised throughout the islands, until he had attained +great proficiency in them. He also taught him the arts of running +and jumping, so that he could jump either up or down a high _pali_, +or run, like a waterfowl on the surface of the water. After this, one +day Kalelealuaka went over to Wailua, where he witnessed the games +of the chiefs. The youth spoke contemptuously of their performances +as mere child's play; and when his remark was reported to the King +he challenged the young man to meet him in a boxing encounter. When +Kalelealuaka came into the presence of the King his royal adversary +asked him what wager he brought. As the youth had nothing with +him, he seriously proposed that each one should wager his own body +against that of the other one. The proposal was readily accepted. The +herald sounded the signal of attack, and both contestants rushed +at each other. Kalelealuaka warily avoided the attack by the King, +and hastened to deliver a blow which left his opponent at his mercy; +and thereupon, using his privilege, he robbed the King of his life, +and to the astonishment of all, carried away the body to lay as +a sacrifice on the altar of the temple, hitherto unconsecrated by +human sacrifice, which he and his father Kaopele had recently built +in honor of their deity. + +After a time there reached the ear of Kalelealuaka a report of the +great strength of a certain chief who lived in Hanalei. Accordingly, +without saying anything about his intention, he went over to the +valley of Hanalei. He found the men engaged in the game of throwing +heavy spears at the trunk of a cocoanut-tree. As on the previous +occasion, he invited a challenge by belittling their exploits, and +when challenged by the chief, fearlessly proposed, as a wager, the +life of one against the other. This was accepted, and the chief had +the first trial. His spear hit the stem of the huge tree and made +its lofty crest nod in response to the blow. It was now the turn +of Kalelealuaka to hurl the spear. In anticipation of the failure +of the youth and his own success, the chief took the precaution to +station his guards about Kalelealuaka, to be ready to seize him on +the instant. In a tone of command our hero bade the guards fall back, +and brandishing his spear, stroked and polished it with his hands from +end to end; then he poised and hurled it, and to the astonishment of +all, lo! the tree was shivered to pieces. On this the people raised +a shout of admiration at the prowess of the youth, and declared he +must be the same hero who had slain the chief at Wailua. In this way +Kalelealuaka obtained a second royal sacrifice with which to grace +the altar of his temple. + +One clear, calm evening, as Kalelealuaka looked out to sea, he +descried the island of Oahu, which is often clearly visible from +Kauai, and asked his father what land that was that stood out against +them. Kaopele told the youth it was Oahu; that the cape that swam out +into the ocean like a waterfowl was Kaena; that the retreating contour +of the coast beyond was Waianae. Thus he described the land to his +son. The result was that the adventurous spirit of Kalelealuaka was +fired to explore this new island for himself, and he expressed this +wish to his father. Everything that Kalelealuaka said or did was good +in the eye of his father, Kaopele. Accordingly, he immediately set to +work and soon had a canoe completely fitted out, in which Kalelealuaka +might start on his travels. Kalelealuaka took with him, as travelling +companion, a mere lad named Kaluhe, and embarked in his canoe. With +two strokes of the paddle his prow grated on the sands of Waianae. + +Before leaving Kauai his father had imparted to Kalelealuaka something +of the topography of Oahu, and had described to him the site of +his former plantation at Keahumoe. At Waianae the two travellers +were treated affably by the people of the district. In reply to the +questions put them, they said they were going sight-seeing. As they +went along they met a party of boys amusing themselves with darting +arrows; one of them asked permission to join their party. This was +given, and the three turned inland and journeyed till they reached a +plain of soft, whitish rock, where they all refreshed themselves with +food. Then they kept on ascending, until Keahumoe lay before them, +dripping with hoary moisture from the mist of the mountain, yet as if +smiling through its tears. Here were standing bananas with ripened, +yellow fruit, upland kalo, and sugar cane, rusty and crooked with +age, while the sweet potatoes had crawled out of the earth and were +cracked and dry. It was the very place where Kaopele, the father of +Kalelealuaka, had years before set out the plants from which these +were descended. + +"This is our food, and a good place, perhaps, for us to settle down," +said Kalelealuaka; "but before we make up our minds to stay here let +me dart an arrow; and if it drops soon we shall stay, but if it flies +afar we shall not tarry here." Kalelealuaka darted his arrow, while +his companions looked on intently. The arrow flew along, passing over +many a hill and valley, and finally rested beyond Kekuapoi, while +they followed the direction of its wonderful flight. Kalelealuaka +sent his companions on to find the arrow, telling them at the same +time to go to the villages and get some awa roots for drink, while +he would remain there and put up a shelter for them. + +On their way the two companions of Kalelealuaka encountered a number +of women washing kalo in a stream, and on asking them if they had +seen their arrow flying that way they received an impertinent answer; +whereupon they called out the name of the arrow, "Pua-ne, Pua-ne," +and it came to their hands at once. At this the women ran away, +frightened at the marvel. + +The two boys then set to gathering awa roots, as they had been +bidden. Seeing them picking up worthless fragments, a kind-hearted +old man, who turned out to be the konohiki of the land, sent by his +servants an abundance of good food to Kalelealuaka. + +On their return the boys found, to their astonishment, that during +their absence Kalelealuaka had put up a fine, large house, which +was all complete but the mats to cover the floors. The kind-hearted +_konohili_ remarked this, and immediately sent her servants to +fetch mats for the floors and sets of kapa for bedding, adding the +command, "And with them bring along some _malos_" (girdles used by +the males). Soon all their wants were supplied, and the three youths +were set up in housekeeping. To these services the konohiki, through +his attendants, added still others; some chewed and strained the awa, +while others cooked and spread for them a bountiful repast. The three +youths ate and drank, and under the drowsy influence of the awa they +slept until the little birds that peopled the wilderness about them +waked them with their morning songs; then they roused and found the +sun already climbing the heavens. + +Now, Kalelealuaka called to his comrades, and said, "Rouse up and let +us go to cultivating." To this they agreed, and each one set to work in +his own way, working his own piece of ground. The ground prepared by +Kalelealuaka was a strip of great length, reaching from the mountain +down toward the ocean. This he cleared and planted the same day. His +two companions, however, spent several days in clearing their ground, +and then several days more in planting it. While these youths occupied +their mountain home, the people of that region were well supplied +with food. The only lack of Kalelealuaka and his comrades was animal +food (literally, fish), but they supplied its place as well as they +could with such herbs as the tender leaves of the popolo, which they +cooked like spinach, and with inamona made from the roasted nuts of +the kukui tree (_Aleurites molluccana_). + +One day, as they were eking out their frugal meal with a mess of popolo +cooked by the lad from Waianae, Kalelealuaka was greatly disgusted at +seeing a worm in that portion that the youth was eating, and thereupon +nicknamed him _Keinohoomanawanui_ (sloven, or more literally, the +persistently unclean). The name ever after stuck to him. This same +fellow had the misfortune, one evening, to injure one of his eyes by +the explosion of a kukui nut which he was roasting on the fire. As a +result, that member was afflicted with soreness, and finally became +blinded. But their life agreed with them, and the youths throve and +increased in stature, and grew to be stout and lusty young men. + +Now, it happened that ever since their stay at their mountain house, +_Lelepua_ (arrow flight), they had kept a torch burning all night, +which was seen by Kakuhihewa, the King of Oahu, and had caused him +uneasiness. + +One fine evening, when they had eaten their fill and had gone to bed, +Kalelealuaka called to Keinohoomanawanui and said, "Halloo there! are +you asleep?" + +And he replied, "No; have I drunk awa? I am restless. My eyes will +not close." + +"Well," said Kalelealuaka, "when you are restless at night, what does +your mind find to do?" + +"Nothing," said the Sloven. + +"I find something to think about," said Kalelealuaka. + +"What is that?" said the Sloven. + +"Let us wish" (_kuko_, literally, to lust), said Kalelealuaka. + +"What shall we wish?" said the Sloven. + +"Whatever our hearts most earnestly desire," said +Kalelealuaka. Thereupon they both wished. The Sloven, in accordance +with his nature, wished for things to eat,--the eels, from the +fish-pond of Hanaloa (in the district of Ewa), to be cooked in an +oven together with sweet potatoes, and a bowl of awa. + +"Pshaw, what a beggarly wish!" said Kalelealuaka. "I thought you had +a real wish. I have a genuine wish. Listen: The beautiful daughters +of Kakuhihewa to be my wives; his fatted pigs and dogs to be baked +for us; his choice kalo, sugar cane, and bananas to be served up for +us; that Kakuhihewa himself send and get timber and build a house +for us; that he pull the famous awa of Kahauone; that the King send +and fetch us to him; that he chew the awa for us in his own mouth, +strain and pour it for us, and give us to drink until we are happy, +and then take us to our house." + +Trembling with fear at the audacious ambition of his concupiscent +companion, the Sloven replied, "If your wish should come to the ears +of the King, we shall die; indeed, we should die." + +In truth, as they were talking together and uttering their wishes, +Kakuhihewa had arrived, and was all the time listening to their +conversation from the outside of their house. When the King had heard +their conversation he thrust his spear into the ground outside the +inclosure about Kalelealuaka's house, and by the spear placed his +stone hatchet (_pahoa_), and immediately returned to his residence at +Puuloa. Upon his arrival at home that night King Kakuhihewa commanded +his stewards to prepare a feast, and then summoned his chiefs and +table companions and said, "Let us sup." When all was ready and they +had seated themselves, the King said, "Shall we eat, or shall we talk?" + +One of them replied: "If it please the King, perhaps it were better +for him to speak first; it may be what he has to say touches a matter +of life and death; therefore, let him speak and we will listen." + +Then Kakuhihewa told them the whole story of the light seen in the +mountains, and of the wishes of Kalelealuaka and the Sloven. + +Then up spoke the soldiers, and said: "Death! This man is worthy to +be put to death; but as for the other one, let him live." + +"Hold," said the King, "not so fast! Before condemning him to death, +I will call together the wise men, priests, wizards, and soothsayers; +perchance they will find that this is the man to overcome Kualii in +battle." Thereupon all the wise men, priests, wizards, and soothsayers +were immediately summoned, and after the King had explained the whole +story to them they agreed with the opinion of the soldiers. Again +the King interposed delay, and said, "Wait until my wise kahuna +Napuaikamao comes; if his opinion agrees with yours, then, indeed, +let the man be put to death; but if he is wiser than you, the man +shall live. But you will have eaten this food in vain." + +So the King sent one of his fleetest runners to go and fetch +Napuaikamao. To him the King said, "I have sent for you to decide +what is just and right in the case of these two men who lived up in +the region of Waipio." Then he went on to state the whole case to +this wise man. + +"In regard to Keinohoomanawanui's wish," said the wise man, "that is an +innocent wish, but it is profitless and will bring no blessing." At +the narration of Kalelealuaka's wish he inclined his head, as if +in thought; then lifting his head, he looked at the King and said: +"O King, as for this man's wish, it is an ambition which will bring +victory to the government. Now, then, send all your people and fetch +house-timber and awa." + +As soon as the wise man had given this opinion, the King commanded +his chief marshal, Maliuhaaino, to set every one to work to carry +out the directions of this counsellor. This was done, and before +break of day every man, woman, and child in the district of Ewa, +a great multitude, was on the move. + +Now, when the Sloven awoke in the morning and went out of doors, +he found the stone hatchet (_pahoa_) of the King, with his spear, +standing outside of the house. On seeing this he rushed back into +the house and exclaimed to his comrades, "Alas! our wishes have been +overheard by the King; here are his hatchet and his spear. I said +that if the King heard us we should die, and he has indeed heard +us. But yours was the fatal ambition; mine was only an innocent wish." + +Even while they were talking, the babble of the multitude drew near, +and the Sloven exclaimed, "Our death approaches!" + +Kalelealuaka replied, "That is not for our death; it is the people +coming to get timber for our houses." But the fear of the Sloven +would not be quieted. + +The multitude pressed on, and by the time the last of them had reached +the mountain the foremost had returned to the sea-coast and had begun +to prepare the foundations for the houses, to dig the holes for the +posts, to bind on the rafters and the small poles on which they tied +the thatch, until the houses were done. + +Meantime, some were busy baking the pigs and the poi-fed dogs in ovens; +some in bringing the eels of Kanaloa and cooking them with potatoes +in an oven by themselves. + +The houses are completed, everything is ready, the grand marshal, +Maliuhaaino, has just arrived in front of the house of the ambitious +youth Kalelealuaka, and calls out "Keinohoomanawanui, come out!" and +he comes out, trembling. "Kalelealuaka, come out!" and he first sends +out the boy Kaluhe and then comes forth himself and stands outside, +a splendid youth. The marshal stands gazing at him in bewilderment +and admiration. When he has regained his equanimity he says to him, +"Mount on my back and let us go down." + +"No," said Kalelealuaka, "I will go by myself, and do you walk ahead. I +will follow after; but do not look behind you, lest you die." + +As soon as they had started down, Kalelealuaka was transported to +Kuaikua, in Helemano. There he plunged into the water and bathed all +over; this done, he called on his ancestral shades (_Aumakua_), who +came and performed on him the rite of circumcision while lightning +flashed, thunder sounded, and the earth quaked. + +Kaopele, on Kauai, heard the commotion and exclaimed, "Ah! my son +has received the purifying rite--the offspring of the gods goes to +meet the sovereign of the land" (_Alii aimoku_). + +Meanwhile, the party led by Maliuhaaino was moving slowly down toward +the coast, because the marshal himself was lame. Returning from his +purification, Kalelealuaka alighted just to the rear of the party, +who had not noticed his absence, and becoming impatient at the tedious +slowness of the journey,--for the day was waning, and the declining +sun was already standing over a peak of the Waianae Mountains called +Puukuua,--this marvellous fellow caught up the lame marshal in one hand +and his two comrades in the other, and, flying with them, set them down +at Puuloa. But the great marvel was, that they knew nothing about being +transported, yet they had been carried and set down as from a sheet. + +On their arrival at the coast all was ready, and the people +were waiting for them. A voice called out, "Here is you house, +Keinohoomanawanui!" and the Sloven entered with alacrity and found +bundles of his wished-for eels and potatoes already cooked and awaiting +his disposal. + +But Kalelealuaka proudly declined to enter the house prepared for +himself when the invitation came to him, "Come in! this is your +house," all because his little friend Kaluhe, whose eyes had often +been filled with smoke while cooking _luau_ and roasting kukui nuts +for him, had not been included in the invitation, and he saw that +no provision had been made for him. When this was satisfactorily +arranged Kalelealuaka and his little friend entered and sat down to +eat. The King, with his own hand, poured out awa for Kalelealuaka, +brought him a gourd of water to rinse his mouth, offered him food, +and waited upon him till he had supplied all his wants. + +Now, when Kalelealuaka had well drunken, and was beginning to feel +drowsy from the awa, the lame marshal came in and led him to the two +daughters of Kakuhihewa, and from that time these two lovely girls +were his wives. + + + +PART III + + +Thus they lived for perhaps thirty days (_he mau anabulu_), when +a messenger arrived, announcing that Kualii was making war at +Moanalua. The soldiers of Kakuhihewa quickly made themselves ready, +and among them Keinohoomanawanui went out to battle. The lame marshal +had started for the scene the night before. + +On the morning of the day of battle, Kalelealuaka said to his wives +that he had a great hankering for some shrimps and moss, which must +be gathered in a particular way, and that nothing else would please +his appetite. Thereupon, they dutifully set out to obtain these things +for him. As soon as they had gone from the house Kalelealuaka flew to +Waianae and arrayed himself with wreaths of the fine-leaved _maile_ +(_Maile laulii_). which is peculiar to that region. Thence he flew to +Napeha, where the lame marshal, Maliuhaaino, was painfully climbing +the hill on his way to battle. Kalelealuaka cheerily greeted him, +and the following dialogue occurred: + +K. "Whither are you trudging, Maliuhaaino?" + +M. "What! don't you know about the war?" + +K. "Let me carry you." + +M. "How fast you travel! Where are you from?" + +K. "From Waianae." + +M. "So I see from your wreaths. Yes, carry me, and Waianae shall +be yours." + +At the word Kalelealuaka picked up the cripple and set him down on +an eminence _mauka_ of the battlefield, saying, "Remain you here and +watch me. If I am killed in the fight, you return by the same way we +came and report to the King." + +Kalelealuaka then addressed himself to the battle, but before attacking +the enemy he revenged himself on those who had mocked and jeered at +him for not joining the forces of Kakuhihewa. This done, he turned his +hand against the enemy, who at the time were advancing and inflicting +severe loss in the King's army. + +To what shall we compare the prowess of our hero? A man was plucked +and torn in his hand as if he were but a leaf. The commotion in the +ranks of the enemy was as when a powerful waterfowl lashes the water +with his wings (_O haehae ka manu, Ke ale nei ka wai_). Kalelealuaka +moved forward in his work of destruction until he had slain the captain +who stood beside the rebel chief, Kualii. From the fallen captain he +took his feather cloak and helmet and cut off his right ear and the +little finger of his right hand. Thus ended the slaughter that day. + +The enthusiasm of the cripple was roused to the highest pitch on +witnessing the achievements of Kalelealuaka, and he determined to +return and report that he had never seen his equal on the battlefield. + +Kalelealuaka returned to Puuloa, and hid the feather cloak and helmet +under the mats of his bed, and having fastened the dead captain's +ear and little finger to the side of the house, lay down and slept. + +After a while, when the two women, his wives, returned with the +moss and shrimps, he complained that the moss was not gathered as he +had directed, and that they had been gone such a long time that his +appetite had entirely left him, and he would not eat of what they +had brought. At this the elder sister said nothing, but the younger +one muttered a few words to herself; and as they were all very tired +they soon went to sleep. + +They had slept a long while when the tramp of the soldiers of +Kakuhihewa was heard, returning from the battle. The King immediately +asked how the battle had gone. The soldiers answered that the +battle had gone well, but that Keinohoomanawanui alone had greatly +distinguished himself. To this the King replied he did not believe +that the Sloven was a great warrior, but when the cripple returned +he would learn the truth. + +About midnight the footsteps of the lame marshal were heard outside +of the King's house. Kakuhihewa called to him, "Come, how went the +battle?" + +"Can't you have patience and let me take breath?" said the +marshal. Then when he had rested himself he answered, "They fought, +but there was one man who excelled all the warriors in the land. He +was from Waianae. I gave Waianae to him as a reward for carrying me." + +"It shall be his," said the King. + +"He tore a man to pieces," said the cripple, "as he would tear a +banana-leaf. The champion of Kualii's army he killed, and plundered +him of his feather cloak and helmet." + +"The soldiers say that Keinohoomanawanui was the hero of the day," +said the King. + +"What!" said the cripple. "He did nothing. He merely strutted +about. But this man--I never saw his equal; he had no spear, his only +weapons were his hands; if a spear was hurled at him, he warded it +off with his hair. His hair and features, by the way, greatly resemble +those of your son-in-law." + +Thus they conversed till daybreak. + +After a few days, again came a messenger announcing that the rebel +Kualii was making war on the plains of Kulaokahua. On hearing this +Kakuhihewa immediately collected his soldiers. As usual, the lame +marshal set out in advance the evening before the battle. + +In the morning, after the army had gone, Kalelealuaka said to his +wives, "I am thirsting for some water taken with the snout of the +calabash held downward. I shall not relish it if it is taken with the +snout turned up." Now, Kalelealuaka knew that they could not fill +the calabash if held this way, but he resorted to this artifice to +present the two young women from knowing of his miraculous flight to +the battle. As soon as the young women had got out of sight he hastened +to Waialua and arrayed himself in the rough and shaggy wreaths of _uki_ +from the lagoons of Ukoa and of _hinahina_ from Kealia. Thus arrayed, +he alighted behind the lame marshal as he climbed the hill at Napeha, +slapped him on the back, exchanged greetings with him, and received a +compliment on his speed; and when asked whence he came, he answered +from Waialua. The shrewd, observant cripple recognized the wreaths +as being those of Waialua, but he did not recognize the man, for the +wreaths with which Kalelealuaka had decorated himself were of such a +color--brownish gray--as to give him the appearance of a man of middle +age. He lifted the cripple as before, and set him down on the brow of +Puowaina (Punch Bowl Hill), and received from the grateful cripple, +as a reward for his service, all the land of Waialua for his own. + +This done, Kalelealuaka repeated the performances of the previous +battle. The enemy melted away before him, whichever way he turned. He +stayed his hand only when he had slain the captain of the host and +stripped him of his feather cloak and helmet, taking also his right +ear and little finger. The speed with which Kalelealuaka returned +to his home at Puuloa was like the flight of a bird. The spoils and +trophies of this battle he disposed of as before. + +The two young women, Kalelealuaka's wives, turned the nozzle of the +water-gourd downward, as they were bidden, and continued to press it +into the water, in the vain hope that it might rise and fill their +container, until the noonday sun began to pour his rays directly upon +their heads; but no water entered their calabash. Then the younger +sister proposed to the elder to fill the calabash in the usual way, +saying that Kalelealuaka would not know the difference. This they did, +and returned home. + +Kalelealuaka would not drink of the water, declaring that it had been +dipped up. At this the younger wife laughed furtively; the elder broke +forth and said: "It is due to the slowness of the way you told us +to employ in getting the water. We are not accustomed to the menial +office of fetching water; our father treated us delicately, and a +man always fetched water for us, and we always used to see him pour +the water into the gourd with the nozzle turned up, but you trickily +ordered us to turn the nozzle down. Your exactions are heartless." + +Thus the women kept complaining until, by and by, the tramp of the +returning soldiers was heard, who were boasting of the great deeds of +Keinohoomanawanui. The King, however, said: "I do not believe a word of +your talk; when my cripple comes he will tell me the truth. I do not +believe that Keinohoomanawanui is an athlete. Such is the opinion I +have formed of him. But there is a powerful man, Kalelealuaka,--if he +were to go into battle I am confident he would perform wonders. Such +is the opinion I have formed of him, after careful study." + +So the King waited for the return of the cripple until night, and +all night until nearly dawn. When finally the lame marshal arrived, +the King prudently abstained from questioning him until he had rested +a while and taken breath; then he obtained from him the whole story +of this new hero from Waialua, whose name he did not know, but who, +he declared, resembled the King's son-in-law, Kalelealuaka. + +Again, on a certain day, came the report of an attack by Kualii at +Kulaokahua, and the battle was to be on the morrow. The cripple, as +usual, started off the evening before. In the morning, Kalelealuaka +called to his wives, and said: "Where are you? Wake up. I wish you +to bake a fowl for me. Do it thus: Pluck it; do not cut it open, +but remove the inwards through the opening behind; then stuff it +with _luau_ from the same end, and bake it; by no means cut it open, +lest you spoil the taste of it." + +As soon as they had left the house he flew to Kahuku and adorned his +neck with wreaths of the pandanus fruit and his head with the flowers +of the sugar cane, thus entirely changing his appearance and making him +look like a gray-haired old man. As on previous days, he paused behind +the cripple and greeted him with a friendly slap on the back. Then +he kindly lifted the lame man and set him down at Puowaina. In return +for this act of kindness the cripple gave him the district of Koolau. + +In this battle he first slew those soldiers in Kakuhihewa's army +who had spoken ill of him. Then he turned his hand against the +warriors of Kualii, smiting them as with the stroke of lightning, +and displaying miraculous powers. When he had reached the captain of +Kualii's force, he killed him and despoiled his body of his feather +cloak and helmet, taking also a little finger and toe. With these he +flew to the cripple, whom he lifted and bore in his flight as far as +Waipio, and there dropped him at a point just below where the water +bursts forth at Waipahu. + +Arrived at his house, Kalelealuaka, after disposing of his spoils, +lay down and slept. After he had slept several hours, his wives came +along in none too pleased a mood and awoke him, saying his meat was +cooked. Kalelealuaka merely answered that it was so late his appetite +had gone, and he did not care to eat. + +At this slight his wives said: "Well, now, do you think we are +accustomed to work? We ought to live without work, like a king's +daughters, and when the men have prepared the food then we should go +and eat it." + +The women were still muttering over their grievance, when along +came the soldiers, boasting of the powers of Keinohoomanawanui, +and as they passed Kalelealuaka's door they said it were well if +the two wives of this fellow, who lounges at home in time of war, +were given to such a brave and noble warrior as Keinohoomanawanui. + +The sun was just sinking below the ocean when the footsteps of the +cripple were heard at the King's door, which he entered, sitting down +within. After a short time the King asked him about the battle. "The +valor and prowess of this third man were even greater than those +of the previous ones; yet all three resemble each other. This day, +however, he first avenged himself by slaying those who had spoken ill +of him. He killed the captain of Kualii's army and took his feather +cloak and helmet. On my return he lifted me as far as Waipahu." + +In a few days again came a report that Kualii had an army at a place +called Kahapaakai, in Nuuanu. Maliuhaaino immediately marshalled his +forces and started for the scene of battle the same evening. + +Early the next morning Kalelealuaka awakened his wives, and said +to them: "Let us breakfast, but do you two eat quietly in your own +house, and I in my house with the dogs; and do not come until I +call you." So they did, and the two women went and breakfasted by +themselves. At his own house Kalelealuaka ordered Kaluhe to stir +up the dogs and keep them barking until his return. Then he sprang +away and lighted at Kapakakolea, where he overtook the cripple, whom, +after the usual interchange of greetings, he lifted, and set down at +a place called Waolani. + +On this day his first action was to smite and slay those who had +reviled him at his own door. That done, he made a great slaughter among +the soldiers of Kualii; then, turning, he seized Keinohoomanawanui, +threw him down and asked him how he became blinded in one eye. + +"It was lost," said the Sloven, "from the thrust of a spear, in a +combat with Olopana." + +"Yes, to be sure," said Kalelealuaka, "while you and I were living +together at Wailuku, you being on one side of the stream and I on +the other, a kukui nut burst in the fire, and that was the spear that +put out your eye." + +When the Sloven heard this, he hung his head. Then Kalelealuaka seized +him to put him to death, when the spear of the Sloven pierced the +fleshy part of Kalelealuaka's left arm, and in plucking it out the +spear-head remained in the wound. + +Kalelealuaka killed Keinohoomanawanui and beheaded him, and, running +to the cripple, laid the trophy at his feet with the words: "I present +you, Maliuhaaino, with the head of Keinohoomanawanui." This done, +he returned to the battle, and went on slaying until he had advanced +to the captain of Kualii's forces, whom he killed and spoiled of his +feather cloak and helmet. + +When Kualii saw that his chief captain, the bulwark of his power, was +slain, he retreated and fled up Nuuanu Valley, pursued by Kalelealuaka, +who overtook him at the head of the valley. Here Kualii surrendered +himself, saying: "Spare my life. The land shall all go to Kakuhihewa, +and I will dwell on it as a loyal subject under him and create no +disturbance as long as I live." + +To this the hero replied: "Well said! I spare your life on these +terms. But if you at any time foment a rebellion, I will take your +life! So, then, return, and live quietly at home and do not stir +up any war in Koolau." Thus warned, Kaulii set out to return to the +"deep blue palis of Koolau." + +While the lame marshal was trudging homeward, bearing the head of +the Sloven, Kalelealuaka alighted from his flight at his house, +and having disposed in his usual manner of his spoils, immediately +called to his wives to rejoin him at his own house. + +The next morning, after the sun was warm, the cripple arrived at the +house of the King in a state of great excitement, and was immediately +questioned by him as to the issue of the battle, "The battle was +altogether successful," said the marshal, "but Keinohoomanawanui was +killed. I brought his head along with me and placed it on the altar +_mauka_ of Kalawao. But I would advise you to send at once your +fleetest runners through Kona and Koolau, commanding everybody to +assemble in one place, that I may review them and pick out and vaunt +as the bravest that one whom I shall recognize by certain marks--for +I have noted him well: he is wounded in the left arm." + +Now, Kakuhihewa's two swiftest runners (_kukini_) were Keakealani and +Kuhelemoana. They were so fleet that they could compass Oahu six times +in a forenoon, or twelve times in a whole day. These two were sent to +call together all the men of the King's domain. The men of Waianae came +that same day and stood in review on the sandy plains of Puuloa. But +among them all was not one who bore the marks sought for. Then came +the men of Kona, of Waialua, and of Koolau, but the man was not found. + +Then the lame marshal came and stood before the King and said: "Your +bones shall rest in peace, Kalani. You had better send now and summon +your son-in-law to come and stand before me; for he is the man." Then +Kakuhihewa arose and went himself to the house of his son-in-law, +and called to his daughters that he had come to get their husband to +go and stand before Maliuhaaino. + +Then Kalelealuaka lifted up the mats of his bed and took out the +feather cloaks and the helmets and arrayed his two wives, and Kaluhe, +and himself. Putting them in line, he stationed the elder of his +wives first, next to her the younger, and third Kaluhe, and placing +himself at the rear of the file, he gave the order to march, and thus +accompanied he went forth to obey the King's command. + +The lame marshal saw them coming, and in ecstasy he prostrated himself +and rolled over in the dust, "The feather cloak and the helmet on +your elder daughter are the ones taken from the captain of Kualii's +army in the first day's fight; those on your second daughter from the +captain of the second day's fight; while those on Kalelealuaka himself +are from the captain killed in the battle on the fourth day. You will +live, but perhaps I shall die, since he is weary of carrying me." + +The lame marshal went on praising and eulogizing Kalelealuaka as +he drew near. Then addressing the hero, he said: "I recognize you, +having met you before. Now show your left arm to the King and to this +whole assembly, that they may see where you were wounded by the spear." + +Then Kalelealuaka bared his left arm and displayed his wound to the +astonished multitude. Thereupon Kakuhihewa said: "Kalelealuaka and +my daughters, do you take charge of the kingdom, and I will pass into +the ranks of the common people under you." + +After this a new arrangement of the lands was made, and the country +had peace until the death of Kakuhihewa; Kalelealuaka also lived +peacefully until death took him. + + + + +X + +STORIES OF THE MENEHUNES + +HAWAII THE ORIGINAL HOME OF THE BROWNIES + +_Thos. G. Thrum_ + + +Students of Hawaiian folk-lore find much of coincident interest with +traditional or more historic beliefs of other and older lands. The +same applies, in a measure, to some of the ancient customs of the +people. This is difficult to account for, more especially since the +Hawaiians possessed no written language by which such knowledge could +be preserved or transmitted. Fornander and others discovered in the +legends of this people traces of the story of the Flood, the standing +still of the sun, and other narratives of Bible history, which some +savants accept as evidence of their Aryan origin. This claim we are not +disposed to dispute, but desire to present another line of tradition +that has been neglected hitherto, yet has promise of much interest. + +It will doubtless interest some readers to learn that Hawaii is the +real home of the Brownies, or was; and that this adventurous nomadic +tribe were known to the Hawaiians long before Swift's satirical mind +conceived his Lilliputians. + +It would be unreasonable to expect so great a range of nationalities +and peculiar characteristics among the pygmies of Hawaii as among +the Brownies of story. Tradition naturally represents them as of one +race, and all nimble workers; not a gentleman dude, or policeman +in the whole lot. Unlike the inquisitive and mischievous athletes +of present fame, the original and genuine Brownies, known as the +Menehunes, are referred to as an industrious race. In fact, it was +their alleged power to perform a marvellous amount of labor in a +short space of time that has fixed them in the minds of Hawaiians, +many of whom point to certain traces of their work in various parts of +the islands to substantiate the traditional claim of their existence. + +Meeting thus with occasional references to this active race, but +mostly in a vague way, it has been a matter of interesting inquiry +among Hawaiians, some of whom were noted _kaao_, or legend-bearers, +for further knowledge on the subject. Very naturally their ideas +differ respecting the Menehunes. Some treat the subject with +gravity and respect, and express the belief that they were the +original inhabitants of these islands, but gradually gave way to +the heavier-bodied ancestors of the present race; others consider +that the history of the race has been forgotten through the lapse of +ages; while the more intelligent and better educated look upon the +Menehunes as a mythical class of gnomes or dwarfs, and the account +of their exploits as having been handed down by tradition for social +entertainment, as other peoples relate fairy stories. + +In the Hawaiian legend of Kumuhonua, Fornander states that the +Polynesians were designated as "the people, descendants from Menehune, +son of Lua Nuu, etc. It disappeared as a national name so long ago, +however, that subsequent legends have changed it to a term of reproach, +representing them at times as a separate race, and sometimes as a +race of dwarfs, skilful laborers, but artful and cunning." + +In the following account and selection of stories gathered from various +native sources, as literal a rendition as possible has been observed +by the translators for the better insight it gives of Hawaiian thought +and character. + + + +MOKE MANU'S ACCOUNT + + +The Menehunes were supposed to have been a wonderful people, small of +stature and of great activity. They were always united in doing any +service required of them. It was their rule that any work undertaken +must be completed in one night, otherwise it would be left unfinished, +as they did not labor twice on the same work; hence the origin of +the saying: "_He po hookahi, a ao ua pau_,"--in one night, and by +dawn it is finished. + +There is no reliable history of the Menehunes. No one knows whence +they came, though tradition says they were the original people of the +Hawaiian Islands. They are thought to have been supernatural beings, +governed by some one higher in rank than themselves, whom they +recognized as having power and authority over them, that assigned +them to the mountains and hills where they lived permanently. They +were said to be the only inhabitants of the islands up to the time +of Papa and Wakea, and were invisible to every one but their own +descendants, or those connected with them in some way. Many persons +could hear the noise and hum of their voices, but the gift of seeing +them with the naked eye was denied to those not akin to them. They +were always willing to do the bidding of their descendants, and their +supernatural powers enabled them to perform some wonderful works. + + + +PI'S WATERCOURSE + + +Pi was an ordinary man living in Waimea, Kauai, who wanted to construct +a _mano_, or dam, across the Waimea River and a watercourse therefrom +to a point near Kikiaola. Having settled upon the best locations for +his proposed work, he went up to the mountains and ordered all the +Menehunes that were living near Puukapele to prepare stones for the +dam and watercourse. The Menehunes were portioned off for the work; +some to gather stones, and others to cut them. All the material was +ready in no time (_manawa ole_), and Pi settled upon the night when +the work was to be done. When the time came he went to the point where +the dam was to be built, and waited. At the dead of night he heard the +noise and hum of the voices of the Menehunes on their way to Kikiaola, +each of whom was carrying a stone. The dam was duly constructed, +every stone fitting in its proper place, and the stone _auwai_, or +watercourse, also laid around the bend of Kikiaola. Before the break +of day the work was completed, and the water of the Waimea River was +turned by the dam into the watercourse on the flat lands of Waimea. + +When the work was finished Pi served out food for the Menehunes, which +consisted of shrimps (_opae_), this being the only kind to be had in +sufficient quantity to supply each with a fish to himself. They were +well supplied and satisfied, and at dawn returned to the mountains +of Puukapele rejoicing, and the hum of their voices gave rise to the +saying, "_Wawa ka Menehune i Puukapele, ma Kauai, puoho ka manu o +ka loko o Kawainui ma Koolaupoko, Oahu_"--the hum of the voices of +the Menehunes at Puukapele, Kauai, startled the birds of the pond of +Kawainui, at Koolaupoko Oahu. + +The _auwai_, or watercourse, of Pi is still to be seen at Kikiaola. + +At one time Pi also told the Menehunes to wall in a fish-pond at +the bend of the Huleia River. They commenced work toward midnight, +but at dawn the walls of the pond were not sufficiently finished to +meet, so it was left incomplete, and has remained so to this day. + + + +LAKA'S ADVENTURE + + +Wahieloa, a chief, lived at Kalaikoi, Kipahulu, Maui. He took to +him a wife named Hinahawea. In due time a boy was born to them, whom +Hinahowana, the mother of Hinahawea, brought up under her own care +at Alaenui. She called him Laka-a-wahieloa. He was greatly petted +by his parents. One day his father went to Hawaii in search of the +_Ala-Koiula a Kane_ for a toy for his son, landing at Punaluu, Kau, +Hawaii, where he was killed in a cave called Keana-a-Kaualehu. + +After a long absence Laka asked for his father, and his mother referred +him to his grandmother, who, on being questioned, told him that his +father went to Hawaii, and was supposed to be dead. Laka then asked +for means by which he could search for his father. + +His grandmother replied: "Go to the mountains and look for the tree +that has leaves shaped like the moon on the night of Hilo, or Hoaka; +such is the tree for a canoe." + +Laka followed this advice, and went to the mountains to find the +tree for his canoe. Finding a suitable one, he commenced to cut +in the morning, and by sundown he had felled it to the ground. This +accomplished, he went home. Returning the next day, to his surprise he +could not find his fallen tree, so he cut down another, with the same +result. Laka was thus tricked for several days, and in his perplexity +consulted again with his grandmother, who sent him off with the same +advice as before, to look for the crescent-shaped leaf. + +He went to the mountains again and found the desired tree, but before +cutting it he dug a big hole on the side where the Kalala-Kamahele +would fall. Upon cutting the tree it fell right into the hole or +trench, as designed; then he jumped into it and lay in waiting for +the person or persons who were reerecting the trees he had cut down +for his canoe. + +While thus waiting, he heard some one talking about raising the tree +and returning it to its former position, followed by someone chanting +as follows: + + + E ka mano o ke Akua, + Ke kini o ke Akua, + Ka lehu o ke Akua, + Ka lalani Akua, + Ka pukui Akua! + E na Akua o ke kuahiwi nei, + I ka mauna, + I ke kualono, + I ka manowai la-e, + E-iho! [7] + + +When this appeal ended there was a hum and noise, and in a short +time (_manawa ole_) the place was filled with a band of people, who +endeavored to lift the tree; but it would not move. Laka then jumped +out from his place of hiding and caught hold of two of the men, +Mokuhalii and Kapaaikee, and threatened to kill them for raising +again the trees he had cut for his canoe. Mokuhalii then told Laka +that if they were killed, nobody would be able to make a canoe for +him, nor would anybody pull it to the beach, but if they were spared +they would willingly do it for him, provided Laka would first build +a big and long shed (_halau_) of sufficient size to hold the canoe, +and prepare sufficient food for the men. Laka gladly consenting, +released them and returned to his home and built a shed on the level +ground of Puhikau. Then he went up to the woods and saw the canoe, +ready and complete. The Menehunes told Laka that it would be brought +to the halau that night. At the dead of night the hum of the voices +of the Menehunes was heard; this was the commencement of the lifting +of the canoe. It was not dragged, but held up by hand. The second +hum of voices brought the canoe to Haloamekiei, at Pueo. And at the +third hum the canoe was carefully laid down in the halau. Food and +fish were there spread out for the workers, the _ha_ of the taro for +food, and the opae and oopu for fish. At dawn the Menehunes returned +to their home. Kuahalau was the name of the halau, the remains of +the foundation of which were to be seen a few years ago, but now it +is ploughed over. The hole dug by Laka still exists. + + + +KEKUPUA'S CANOE + + +Kakae, a chief, lived at Wahiawa, Kukaniloko, Waialua, Oahu. One day +his wife told him that she desired to go in search of her brother, +Kahanaiakeakua, who was supposed to be living at Tahiti. Kakae +thereupon ordered his man Kekupua to go into the woods and find +a suitable tree and make a canoe for his wife for this foreign +voyage. Kekupua, with a number of men under him, searched in the +forest belt of Wahiawa, Helemano, and Waoala, as also through the +woods of Koolau, without success. From Kahana they made a search +through the mountains till they came to Kilohana, in Kalihi Valley, +and from there to Waolani, in Nuuanu, where they slept in a cave. In +the dead of night they heard the hum as of human voices, but were +unable to discern any person, though the voices sounded close to +them. At dawn silence reigned again, and when the sun arose, lo, +and behold! there stood a large mound of stones, the setting of which +resembled that of a _heiau_, or temple, the remains of which are said +to be noticeable to this day. + +Kekupua and his men returned to their chief and reported their +unsuccessful search for a suitable _koa_ (_Acacia koa_) tree for +the desired canoe, and related also the incident at Waolani. Kakae, +being a descendant of the Menehunes, knew immediately the authors of +the strange occurrence. He therefore instructed Kekupua to proceed to +Makaho and Kamakela and to stay there till the night of Kane, then go +up to Puunui and wait till hearing the hum and noise of the Menehunes, +which would be the signal of their finishing the canoe. And thus it +was; the Menehunes, having finished the canoe, were ready to pull +it to the sea. He directed them to look sharp, and two men would be +noticed holding the ropes at the _pu_ (or head) of the canoe. One of +them would leap from one side to the other; he was the director of the +work and was called _pale_. There would be some men farther behind, +holding the _kawelewele_, or guiding-ropes. They were the _kahunas_ +that superintended the construction of the canoe. He reminded them +to remember these directions, and when they saw these men, to give +them orders and show them the course to take in pulling the canoe to +the sea. + +Kekupua followed all these instructions faithfully. He waited +at Puunui till dusk, when he heard a hum as of many voices, and +proceeding farther up near the slope of Alewa he saw these wonderful +people. They were like ordinary human beings but diminutive. He +directed them to pull the canoe along the _nae_, or farther side of +the Puunui stream. By this course the canoe was brought down as far +as Kaalaa, near Waikahalulu, where, when daylight came, they left +their burden and returned to Waolani. The canoe was left in the ditch, +where it remained for many generations, and was called Kawa-a-Kekupua +(Kekupua's canoe), in honor of the servant of the chief Kakae. + +Thus, even with the help of the Menehunes, the wife of Kakae was not +satisfied in her desire. + + + +AS HEIAU BUILDERS + + +The Menehunes are credited with the construction of numerous _heiaus_ +(ancient temples) in various parts of the islands. + +The heiau of Mookini, near Honoipu, Kohala, is pointed out as an +instance of their marvellous work. The place selected for the site +of the temple was on a grassy plain. The stones in the nearest +neighborhood were for some reason not deemed suitable for the +work, so those of Pololu Valley, distant some twelve miles, were +selected. Tradition says the Menehunes were placed in a line covering +the entire distance from Pololu to Honoipu, whereby the stones were +passed from hand to hand for the entire work. Work was begun at the +quiet of night, and at cock-crow in the morning it was finished. Thus +in one night the heiau of Mookini was built. + +Another temple of their erection was at Pepeekeo, Hilo, the peculiarity +of the work being that the stones had been brought together by the +residents of that part of the district, by direction of the chief, but +that in one night, the Menehunes gathered together and built it. The +chief and his people were surprised on coming the next morning to +resume their labors, to find the heiau completed. + +There stands on the pali of Waikolu, near Kalaupapa, Molokai, +a heiau that Hawaiians believe to have been constructed by no one +else than the Menehunes. It is on the top of a ledge in the face of +a perpendicular cliff, with a continuous inaccessible cliff behind it +reaching hundreds of feet above. No one has ever been able to reach it +either from above or from below; and the marvel is how the material, +which appears to be seashore stones, was put in place. + + + + +XI + +KAHALAOPUNA, PRINCESS OF MANOA + +_Mrs. E. M. Nakuina_ + + +Akaaka (laughter) is a projecting spur of the mountain range at the +head of Manoa Valley, forming the ridge running back to and above +Waiakeakua, "the water of the gods." Akaaka was united in marriage +to Nalehuaakaaka, still represented by some lehua (_Metrosideros +polymorpha_) bushes on the very brow of the spur or ridge. They had +two children, twins, Kahaukani, a boy, and Kauakuahine, a girl. These +children were adopted at birth by a chief, Kolowahi, and chieftainess, +Pohakukala, who were brother and sister, and cousins of Akaaka. The +brother took charge of the boy, Kahaukani, a synonyme for the Manoa +wind; and Pohakukala the girl, Kauakuahine, meaning the famous +Manoa rain. When the children were grown up, the foster parents +determined that they should be united; and the children, having been +brought up separately and in ignorance of their relationship, made +no objections. They were accordingly married and a girl was born +to them, who was called Kahalaopuna. Thus Kolowahi and Pohakukala, +by conspiring to unite the twin brother and sister, made permanent +the union of rain and wind for which Manoa Valley is noted; and the +fruit of such a union was the most beautiful woman of her time. So +the Manoa girls, foster children of the Manoa rains and winds, have +generally been supposed to have inherited the beauty of Kahalaopuna. + +A house was built for Kahalaopuna at Kahaiamano on the road to +Waiakekua, where she lived with a few attendants. The house was +surrounded by a fence of auki (_dracaena_), and a _puloulou_ (sign of +kapu) was placed on each side of the gate, indicative of forbidden +ground. The puloulou were short, stout poles, each surmounted +by a ball of white kapa cloth, and indicated that the person or +persons inhabiting the premises so defined were of the highest rank, +and sacred. + +Kahalaopuna was very beautiful from her earliest childhood. Her cheeks +were so red and her face so bright that a glow emanated therefrom +which shone through the thatch of her house when she was in; a rosy +light seemed to envelop the house, and bright rays seemed to play over +it constantly. When she went to bathe in the spring below her house, +the rays of light surrounded her like a halo. The natives maintain +that this bright light is still occasionally seen at Kahaiamano, +indicating that the spirit of Kahalaopuna is revisiting her old home. + +She was betrothed in childhood to Kauhi, the young chief of Kailua, in +Koolau, whose parents were so sensible of the honor of the contemplated +union of their son with the Princess of Manoa, who was deemed of a +semi-supernatural descent, that they always sent the poi of Kailua and +the fish of Kawainui for the girl's table. She was thus, as it were, +brought up entirely on the food of her prospective husband. + +When she was grown to young womanhood, she was so exquisitely beautiful +that the people of the valley would make visits to the outer puloulou +at the sacred precinct of Luaalea, the land adjoining Kahaiamano, just +to get a glimpse of the beauty as she went to and from the spring. In +this way the fame of her surpassing loveliness was spread all over +the valley, and came to the ears of two men, Kumauna and Keawaa, +both of whom were disfigured by a contraction of the lower eyelids, +and were known as _makahelei_ (drawn eyes). Neither of these men had +ever seen Kahalaopuna, but they fell in love with her from hear-say, +and not daring to present themselves to her as suitors on account +of their disfigurement, they would weave and deck themselves _leis_ +(wreaths) of maile (_Alyxia olivaeformis_), ginger, and ferns and go to +Waikiki for surf-bathing. While there they would indulge in boasting +of their conquest of the famous beauty, representing the leis with +which they were decked as love-gifts from Kahalaopuna. Now, when +the surf of Kalehuawehe at Waikiki was in proper condition, it would +attract people from all parts of the island to enjoy the delightful +sport. Kauhi, the betrothed of Kahalaopuna, was one of these. The +time set for his marriage to Kahalaopuna was drawing near, and as +yet he had not seen her, when the assertions of the two makahelei +men came to his ears. These were repeated so frequently that Kauhi +finally came to believe them, and they so filled him with jealous +rage of his betrothed that he determined to kill her. He started for +Manoa at dawn, and proceeded as far as Mahinauli, in mid-valley, +where he rested under a hala (_Pandanus odoratissimus_) tree that +grew in the grove of wiliwili (_Erythrina monosperma_). He sat there +some time, brooding over the fancied injury to himself, and nursing +his wrath. Upon resuming his walk he broke off and carried along with +him a bunch of hala nuts. It was quite noon when he reached Kahaiamano +and presented himself before the house of Kahalaopuna. The latter had +just awakened from a sleep, and was lying on a pile of mats facing +the door, thinking of going to the spring, her usual bathing-place, +when she perceived a stranger at the door. + +She looked at him some time and, recognizing him from oft repeated +descriptions, asked him to enter; but Kauhi refused, and asked her +to come outside. The young girl had been so accustomed from early +childhood to consider herself as belonging to Kauhi, and of being +indebted to him, as it were, for her daily food, that she obeyed +him unhesitatingly. + +He perhaps intended to kill her then, but the girl's unhesitating +obedience as well as her extreme loveliness made him hesitate for a +while; and after looking intently at her for some time he told her +to go and bathe and then prepare herself to accompany him in a ramble +about the woods. + +While Kahalaopuna was bathing, Kauhi remained moodily seated where +she had left him, and watched the bright glow, like rainbow rays, +playing above the spring. He was alternately filled with jealousy, +regret, and longing for the great beauty of the girl; but that did +not make him relent in his dreadful purpose. He seemed to resent his +betrothed's supposed infidelity the more because she had thrown herself +away on such unworthy persons, who were, besides, ugly and disfigured, +while he, Kauhi, was not only a person of rank and distinction, +but possessed also of considerable manly beauty. + +When she was ready he motioned her to follow him, and turned to go +without a word. They went across Kumakaha to Hualea, when the girl +said, "Why don't you stay and have something to eat before we go?" + +He answered rather surlily, "I don't care to eat; I have no appetite." + +He looked so sternly at her as he said this that she cried out to him, +"Are you annoyed with me? Have I displeased you in any way?" + +He only said, "Why, what have you done that would displease me?" + +He kept on his way, she following, till they came to a large stone +in Aihualama, when he turned abruptly and, facing the young girl, +looked at her with an expression of mingled longing and hate. At last, +with a deep sigh, he said, "You are beautiful, my betrothed, but, +as you have been false, you must die." + +The young girl looked up in surprise at these strange words, but +saw only hatred and a deadly purpose in Kauhi's eyes; so she said: +"If I have to die, why did you not kill me at home, so that my people +could have buried my bones; but you brought me to the wild woods, +and who will bury me? If you think I have been false to you, why not +seek proof before believing it?" + +But Kauhi would not listen to her appeal. Perhaps it only served to +remind him of what he considered was his great loss. He struck her +across the temple with the heavy bunch of hala nuts he had broken +off at Mahinauli, and which he had been holding all the time. The +blow killed the girl instantly, and Kauhi hastily dug a hole under +the side of the rock and buried her; then he started down the valley +toward Waikiki. + +As soon as he was gone, a large owl, who was a god, and a relative +of Kahalaopuna, and had followed her from home, immediately set to +digging the body out; which done, it brushed the dirt carefully off +with its wings and, breathing into the girl's nostrils, restored her to +life. It rubbed its face against the bruise on the temple, and healed +it immediately. Kauhi had not advanced very far on his way when he +heard the voice of Kahalaopuna singing a lament for his unkindness, +and beseeching him to believe her, or, at least, prove his accusation. + +Hearing her voice, Kauhi returned, and, seeing the owl flying above +her, recognized the means of her resurrection; and, going up to the +girl, ordered her to follow him. They went up the side of the ridge +which divides Manoa Valley from Nuuanu. It was hard work for the +tenderly nurtured maiden to climb the steep mountain ridge, at one +time through a thorny tangle of underbrush, and at another clinging +against the bare face of the rocks, holding on to swinging vines for +support. Kauhi never offered to assist her, but kept on ahead, only +looking back occasionally to see that she followed. When they arrived +at the summit of the divide she was all scratched and bruised, and +her _pa-u_ (skirt) in tatters. Seating herself on a stone to regain +her breath, she asked Kauhi where they were going. He never answered, +but struck her again with the hala branch, killing her instantly, +as before. He then dug a hole near where she lay, and buried her, and +started for Waikiki by way of the Kakea ridge. He was no sooner out +of sight than the owl again scratched the dirt away and restored the +girl, as before. Again she followed and sang a song of love and regret +for her lover's anger, and pleaded with him to lay aside his unjust +suspicions. On hearing her voice again, Kauhi returned and ordered +her to follow him. They descended into Nuuanu Valley, at Kaniakapupu, +and crossed over to Waolani ridge, where he again killed and buried +the faithful girl, who was again restored by the owl. When he was +on his way back, as before, she sang a song, describing the perils +and difficulties of the way traversed by them, and ended by pleading +for pardon for the unknown fault. The wretched man, on hearing her +voice again, was very angry; and his repeated acts of cruelty and +the suffering endured by the girl, far from softening his heart, +only served to render him more brutal, and to extinguish what little +spark of kindly feeling he might have had originally. His only thought +was to kill her for good, and thus obtain some satisfaction for his +wasted poi and fish. He returned to her and ordered her, as before, +to follow him, and started for Kilohana, at the head of Kalihi Valley, +where he again killed her. She was again restored by the owl, and made +her resurrection known by singing to her cruel lover. He this time +took her across gulches, ravines, and plains, until they arrived at +Pohakea, on the Ewa slope of the Kaala Mountains, where he killed her +and buried her under a large _koa_ (_Acacia koa_). The faithful owl +tried to scrape the dirt away, so as to get at the body of the girl, +but his claws became entangled in the numerous roots and rootlets which +Kauhi had been careful not to cut away. The more the owl scratched, +the more deeply tangled he got, and, finally, with bruised claws and +ruffled feathers, he had to give up the idea of rescuing the girl; +and perhaps he thought it useless, as she would be sure to make her +resurrection known to Kauhi. So the owl left, and followed Kauhi on +his return to Waikiki. + +There had been another witness to Kauhi's cruelties, and that was +Elepaio (_Chasiempis sandwichensis_), a little green bird, a cousin to +Kahalaopuna. As soon as this bird saw that the owl had deserted the +body of Kahalaopuna, it flew straight to Kahaukani and Kauakuahine, +and told them of all that had happened. The girl had been missed, but, +as some of the servants had recognized Kauhi, and had seen them leave +together for what they supposed was a ramble in the adjoining woods, +no great anxiety had been felt, as yet. But when the little bird told +his tale, there was great consternation, and even positive disbelief; +for, how could any one in his senses, they argued, be guilty of such +cruelty to such a lovely, innocent being, and one, too, belonging +entirely to himself. + +In the meantime, the spirit of the murdered girl discovered itself +to a party who were passing by; and one of them, a young man, moved +with compassion, went to the tree indicated by the spirit, and, +removing the dirt and roots, found the body, still warm. He wrapped +it in his _kihei_ (shoulder scarf), and then covered it entirely with +maile, ferns, and ginger, and, making a _haawe_, or back-load, of it, +carried it to his home at Kamoiliili. There, he submitted the body +to his elder brother, who called upon two spirit sisters of theirs, +with whose aid they finally succeeded in restoring it to life. In the +course of the treatment she was frequently taken to an underground +water-cave, called Mauoki, for the _Kakelekele_ (hydropathic cure). The +water-cave has ever since been known as the "Water of Kahalaopuna." + +The young man who had rescued her from the grave naturally wanted +her to become his bride; but the girl refused, saying that as long +as Kauhi lived she was his, and none other's, as her very body was, +as it were, nourished on his food, and was as much his property as +the food had been. + +The elder brother then counselled the younger to seek, in some way, +the death of Kauhi. To this end they conspired with the parents of +Kahalaopuna to keep her last resurrection secret. The young man then +set to work to learn all the meles Kahalaopuna had sung to her lover +during that fatal journey. When he knew these songs well, he sought +the _kilu_ (play, or game) houses of the King and high chiefs, where +Kauhi was sure to be found. + +One day, when Kauhi was playing, this young man placed himself on the +opposite side, and as Kauhi ceased, took up the kilu and chanted the +first of Kahalaopuna's meles. + +Kauhi was very much surprised, and contrary to the etiquette of the +game of kilu, stopped him in his play to ask him where he had learned +that song. The young man answered he had learned it from Kahalaopuna, +the famous Manoa beauty, who was a friend of his sister's and who was +now on a visit at their house. Kauhi, knowing the owl had deserted the +body of the girl, felt certain that she was really dead, and accused +the other of telling a lie. This led to an angry and stormy scene, +when the antagonists were parted by orders of the King. + +The next night found them both at the kilu house, when the second +of Kahalaopuna's songs was sung, and another angry discussion took +place. Again they were separated by others. On the third night, +the third song having been sung, the dispute between the young men +became so violent that Kauhi told the young man that the Kahalaopuna +he knew must be an impostor, as the real person of that name was dead, +to his certain knowledge. He dared him to produce the young woman whom +he had been representing as Kahalaopuna; and should she not prove to +be the genuine one then his life should be the forfeit, and on the +other hand, if it should be the real one, then he, Kauhi, should be +declared the liar and pay for his insults to the other with his life. + +This was just what the young man had been scheming to compass, and +he quickly assented to the challenge, calling on the King and chiefs +to take notice of the terms of agreement, and to see that they were +enforced. + +On the appointed day Kahalaopuna went to Waikiki, attended by her +parents, relatives, servants, and the two spirit sisters, who had +assumed human form for that day so as to accompany their friend and +advise her in case of necessity. Akaaka, the grandfather, who had been +residing in Waikiki some little time previous to the dispute between +the young men, was appointed one of the judges at the approaching +trial. + +Kauhi had consulted the priests and sorcerers of his family as to +the possibility of the murdered girl having assumed human shape for +the purpose of working him some injury. Kaea, a famous priest and +seer of his family, told him to have the large leaves of the a-pe +(_Calladium costatum_) spread where Kahalaopuna and party were to be +seated. If she was a spirit, she would not be able to tear the a-pe +leaf on which she would be seated, but if human, the leaf or leaves +would be torn. With the permission of the King, this was done. The +latter, surrounded by the highest chiefs and a vast assemblage from +all parts of the island, was there to witness the test. + +When Kahalaopuna and party were on the road to the scene of the test, +her spirit friends informed her of the a-pe leaves, and advised her +to trample on them so as to tear them as much as possible, as they, +being spirits, would be unable to tear the leaves on which they should +be seated, and if any one's attention were drawn to them, they would +be found out and killed by the _poe po-i uhane_ (spirit catchers). + +The young girl faithfully performed what was required of her. Kaea, +on seeing the torn leaves, remarked that she was evidently human, +but that he felt the presence of spirits, and would watch for them, +feeling sure they were in some way connected with the girl. Akaaka +then told him to look in a calabash of water, when he would in all +probability see the spirits. The seer, in his eagerness to unravel the +mystery, forgot his usual caution and ordered a vessel of water to be +brought, and, looking in, he saw only his own reflection. Akaaka at +that moment caught the reflection of the seer (which was his spirit), +and crushed it between his palms, and at that moment the seer dropped +down dead. Akaaka now turned around and opened his arms and embraced +Kahalaopuna, thus acknowledging her as his own beloved granddaughter. + +The King now demanded of the girl and of Kauhi an account of all +that had happened between them, and of the reported death of the +maiden. They both told their stories, Kauhi ascribing his anger +to hearing the assertions of the two disfigured men, Kumauna and +Keawaa. These two, on being confronted with the girl, acknowledged +never having seen her before, and that all their words had been idle +boastings. The King then said: "As your fun has cost this innocent +girl so much suffering, it is my will that you two and Kauhi suffer +death at once, as a matter of justice; and if your gods are powerful +enough to restore you, so much the better for you." + +Two large _imus_ (ground ovens) had been heated by the followers of the +young men, in anticipation of the possible fate of either, and Kauhi, +with the two mischief-makers and such of their respective followers and +retainers as preferred to die with their chiefs, were baked therein. + +The greater number of Kauhi's people were so incensed with his cruelty +to the lovely young girl that they transferred their allegiance to her, +offering themselves for her vassals as restitution, in a measure, +for the undeserved sufferings borne by her at the hands of their +cruel chief. + +The King gave her for a bride to the young man who had not only saved +her, but had been the means of avenging her wrongs. + +The imus in which Kauhi and his companions were baked were on the +side of the stream of Apuakehau, in the famous Ulukou grove, and very +near the sea. The night following, a great tidal wave, sent in by a +powerful old shark god, a relative of Kauhi's, swept over the site +of the two ovens, and in the morning it was seen that their contents +had disappeared. The bones had been taken by the old shark into the +sea. The chiefs, Kumauna and Keawaa, were, through the power of their +family gods, transformed into the two mountain peaks on the eastern +corner of Manoa Valley, while Kauhi and his followers were turned +into sharks. + +Kahalaopuna lived happily with her husband for about two years. Her +grandfather, knowing of Kauhi's transformation, and aware of his +vindictive nature, strictly forbade her from ever going into the +sea. She remembered and heeded the warning during those years, +but one day, her husband and all their men having gone to Manoa to +cultivate kalo (_Colocasia antiquorum_), she was left alone with her +maid servants. + +The surf on that day was in fine sporting condition, and a number +of young women were surf-riding, and Kahalaopuna longed to be with +them. Forgetting the warning, as soon as her mother fell asleep she +slipped out with one of her maids and swam out on a surf-board. This +was Kauhi's opportunity, and as soon as she was fairly outside the +reef he bit her in two and held the upper half of the body up out of +the water, so that all the surf-bathers would see and know that he +had at last obtained his revenge. + +Immediately on her death the spirit of the young woman went back and +told her sleeping mother of what had befallen her. The latter woke +up, and, missing her, gave the alarm. This was soon confirmed by the +terrified surf-bathers, who had all fled ashore at seeing the terrible +fate of Kahalaopuna. Canoes were launched and manned, and chase given +to the shark and his prey, which could be easily tracked by the blood. + +He swam just far enough below the surface of the water to be visible, +and yet too far to be reached with effect by the fishing-spears of +the pursuers. He led them a long chase to Waianae; then, in a sandy +opening in the bottom of the sea, where everything was visible to the +pursuers, he ate up the young woman, so that she could never again +be restored to this life. + +Her parents, on hearing of her end, retired to Manoa Valley, and gave +up their human life, resolving themselves into their supernatural +elements. Kahaukani, the father, is known as the Manoa wind, but his +usual and visible form is the grove of ha-u (_hibiscus_) trees, below +Kahaiamano. Kauakuahine, the mother, assumed her rain form, and is +very often to be met with about the former home of her beloved child. + +The grandparents also gave up their human forms, and returned, the +one to his mountain form, and the other into the lehua bushes still +to be met with on the very brow of the hill, where they keep watch +over the old home of their petted and adored grandchild. + + + + +XII + +THE PUNAHOU SPRING + +_Mrs. E. M. Nakuina_ + + +There formerly lived on the Kaala Mountains a chief by the name +of Kahaakea. He had two children, a boy and a girl, twins, whose +mother had died at their birth. The brother was called _Kauawaahila_ +(Waahila Rain), and the girl _Kauakiowao_ (Mountain Mist). Kahaakea +was very tenderly attached to his motherless children, and after a +while took to himself a wife, thinking thus to provide his children +with a mother's care and love. This wife was called Hawea and had a +boy by her former husband. This boy was deformed and ugly, while the +twins were very beautiful. The stepmother was jealous of their beauty, +and resented the universal admiration expressed for them, while no one +noticed her boy except with looks of aversion. She was very considerate +toward the twins when their father was present, but hated and detested +them most violently. When they were about ten years old their father +had occasion to go to Hawaii, and had to remain away a long time. He +felt perfectly safe in leaving his children with his wife, as she had +always feigned great love for them, and had successfully concealed from +him her real feelings in regard to them. But as soon as he was fairly +away she commenced a series of petty persecutions of the poor children. + +It seems the mother of the children had been "_uhae ia_" at her +death. That is, certain prayers, invocations, fasting, and humiliation +had been performed by certain relatives of the deceased, and quantities +of prepared awa, black, unblemished pig, red fish, and all the +customary food of the gods, had been prepared and offered with the +object of strengthening the spirit of the departed and of attracting it +strongly, as well as giving it a sort of power and control over mundane +affairs and events. So when Hawea began to persecute her stepchildren, +the spirit of their own mother would assist and protect them. + +The persecutions of the stepmother at last became unendurable +to the twins. She not only deprived them of food, clothing, and +water, but subjected them besides to all sorts of indignities and +humiliations. Driven to desperation, they fled to Konahuanui, the +mountain peak above the Pali of Nuuanu; but were soon discovered +and driven away from there by the cruel Hawea. They then went to the +head of Manoa Valley. The stepmother was not at all pleased at their +getting out of the way of her daily persecutions, and searched for +them everywhere. She finally tracked them by the constant appearance +of rainbows at the head of Manoa Valley, those unfailing attendants +of rain and mist. The children were again driven away and told to +return to Kaala, where they would be constantly under her eye; but +they ran and hid themselves in a small cave on the side of the hill +of Kukaoo, whose top is crowned by the temple of the Menehunes. Here +they lived some time and cultivated a patch of sweet potatoes, their +food at this time being grasshoppers and greens. The greens were the +leaves and the tender shoots of the popolo, aheahea, pakai, laulele +and potato vines, cooked by rolling hot stones around and among them +in a covered gourd. This is called the _puholoholo_. + +When their potato tubers were fit to be eaten, the brother (Waahila +Rain) made a double _imu_ (oven), having a _kapu_, or sacred side, +for his food and a _noa_, or free side, for his sister. The little +cave that was their dwelling was also divided in two, a sacred and a +free part, respectively, for brother and sister. The cave can still +be seen, and the wall of stone dividing it in two was still intact +a few years ago, as also was the double imu. In olden times it was +tabooed to females to appear at any eating-place of the males. + +When their crops were fairly ripe, the stepmother found them again, +and drove them away from their cave, she appropriating the fruit +of their labors. The children fled to the rocky hills just back of +Punahou, where they found two small caves, which the brother and +sister occupied, respectively, as dwellings. The rolling plains and +small ravines of the surrounding country, and of what was later known +as the Punahou pasture, were not then covered with manienie grass, but +with the indigenous shrubs and bushes, tall limas, aheaheas, popolo, +etc., making close thickets, with here and there open spaces covered +with _manienie-akiaki_, the valuable medicinal grass of the olden +times. These shrubs and bushes either bore edible fruit or flowers, +or the leaves and tender shoots made nourishing and satisfying food +when cooked in the way previously described. The poor children lived +on these and grasshoppers, and sometimes wild fowl. + +One day the sister, Kauakiowao, told her brother that she wanted to +bathe, and complained of their having taken up their residence in a +place where no water could be found. Her brother hushed her complaint +by telling her that it was a safe place, and one where their stepmother +would not be likely to look for them, but he would try to get her some +water. In his trips around the neighborhood for fruit and greens he +had noticed a large rain-water pond to the east of the hill on which +they dwelt. This pond was called Kanawai. Here he sometimes came to +snare wild ducks. He also had met and knew the Kakea water god, a moo, +who had charge of and controlled all the water sources of Manoa and +Makiki Valleys. This god was one of the ancestors of the children on +the mother's side, and was on the best of terms with Waahila rain. The +boy paid him a visit, and asked him to assist him to open a watercourse +from the pond of Kanawai to a place he indicated in front of and below +the caves inhabited by himself and his sister. The old water god not +only consented to help his young relative, but promised to divide the +water supply of the neighboring Wailele spring, and let it run into +the watercourse that the boy would make, thus insuring its permanence. + +Waahila Rain then went to the pond of Kanawai and dived under, the +water god causing a passage to open underground to the spot indicated, +and swam through the water underground till he came out at the place +now known as the Punahou Spring. The force of the rushing waters as +they burst through the ground soon sufficed to make a small basin, +which the boy proceeded to bank and wall up, leaving a narrow outlet +for the surplus waters. With the invisible help of the old water god, +he immediately set to work to excavate a good-sized pond for his +sister to swim in, and when she awoke from a noonday nap, she was +astonished to behold a lovely sheet of water where, in the morning, +was only dry land. Her brother was swimming and splashing about in it, +and gayly called to his sister to come and try her bathing-place. + +Kauawaahila afterward made some kalo patches, and people, attracted +by the water and consequent fertility of the place, came and settled +about, voluntarily offering themselves as vassals to the twins. More +and more kalo patches were excavated, and the place became a thriving +settlement. The spring became known as _Ka Punahou_ (the new spring), +and gave its name to the surrounding place. + +About this time Kahaakea returned, and hearing of the persecutions to +which his beloved children had been subjected, killed Hawea and then +himself. Rocky Hill, the home of the children, was called after him, +and is known by that name to the present day. Hawea has ever since +then been a synonyme in the Hawaiian mind for a cruel stepmother. + +The Mountain Mist and Waahila Rain afterward returned to the home of +their infancy, Kaala, where they would stay a while, occasionally +visiting Konahuanui and upper Manoa Valley, and may be met with in +these places at the present day. + +They also occasionally visited Punahou, which was under their especial +care and protection; but when the land and spring passed into the hands +of foreigners, who did not pay homage to the twins, and who allowed +the springs to be defiled by the washing of unclean articles and by +the bathing of unclean persons, the twins indignantly left the place, +and retired to the head of Manoa Valley. + +They sometimes pass swiftly over their old home on their way to Kaala, +or Konahuanui, and on such occasions will sometimes linger sorrowfully +for a few minutes about Rocky Hill. The rain-water pond of Kanawai is +now always dry, as the shrubs and bushes which supplied the food of the +twins favored of the gods have disappeared. Old natives say that there +is now no inducement for the gentle rain of the Uakiowao and Uawaahila +to visit those bare hills and plains, as they would find no food there. + + + + +XIII + +OAHUNUI + +_Mrs. E. M. Nakuina_ + + +On the plateau lying between Ewa and Waialua, on the island of Oahu, +and about a mile off, and mauka of the Kaukonahua bridge, is the +historical place called Kukaniloko. This was the ancient birthplace of +the Oahu kings and rulers. It was incumbent on all women of the royal +line to retire to this place when about to give birth to a child, +on pain of forfeiting the rank, privileges, and prerogatives of her +expected offspring, should that event happen in a less sacred place. + +The stones were still standing some years ago, and perhaps are yet +undisturbed, where the royal accouchements took place. In ancient +times this locality was taboo ground, for here the high priest of +the island had his headquarters. Himself descended from the chief +families, and being, in many instances, an uncle or younger brother of +the reigning king, or connected by marriage with those of the royal +line, and being also at the head of a numerous, well organized, and +powerful priesthood, his influence was hardly second to that of the +king, and in some matters his authority was paramount. + +A few miles mauka of Kukaniloko, toward the Waimea Mountains, is +Helemano, where the last of the cannibal chiefs from the South Seas +finally settled when driven from the plains of Mokuleia and Waialua by +the inhabitants of those districts; for the people had been exasperated +by the frequent requisitions on the _kamaainas_ (original inhabitants) +by the stranger chiefs to furnish material for their cannibal feasts. + +To the east of Helemano, and about the same distance from Kukaniloko, +is Oahunui (Greater Oahu), another historical place. This was the +residence of the kings of the island. Tradition has it that previous +to the advent of the cannibal strangers the place was known by +another name. + +When the Lo Aikanaka, as the last of the man-eating chiefs are called, +were constrained to take up their residence in upper Helemano, +a district just outside of the boundaries of those reserved for +the royal and priestly residences, a young man called Oahunui was +king. An elder sister named Kilikiliula, who had been as a mother +to him, was supposed to share equally with him the royal power and +prerogative. This sister was married to a chief named Lehuanui, of the +priestly line, but one not otherwise directly connected with royalty, +and was the mother of three children; the two eldest being boys and +the youngest a girl. They all lived together in the royal enclosure, +but in separate houses, according to ancient custom. + +Now, the Lo Aikanaka, on establishing themselves in upper Helemano, +had at first behaved very well. They had been circumspect and prudent +in their intercourse with the royal retainers, and had visited the +young King to render their homage with every appearance of humility. + +Oahunui was quite captivated by the plausible, suave manners of the +ingratiating southern chief and those of his immediate retainers, +and he invited them to a feast. + +This civility was reciprocated, and the King dined with the +strangers. Here it was strongly suspected that the dish of honor +placed before the King was human flesh, served under the guise of pork. + +The King found the dish very much to his liking, and intimated to +the Lo Aikanaka chief that his _aipuu-puu_ (chief cook or steward) +understood the preparation and cooking of pork better than the royal +cook did. + +The Lo Aikanaka took the hint, and the young King became a very +frequent guest at the Southerner's board--or rather, mat table. Some +excuse or other would be given to invite the royal guest, such as a +challenge to the King to a game of _konane_ (a game like checkers); or +a contest of skill in the different athletic and warlike sports would +be arranged, and Oahunui would be asked to be the judge, or simply +invited to view them. As a matter of course, it would be expected +that the King would remain after the sports and partake of food when +on friendly visits of this nature. Thus with one excuse or another +he spent a great deal of his time with his new subjects and friends. + +To supply the particular dainty craved by the royal visitor, the Lo +Aikanaka had to send out warriors to the passes leading to Waianae +from Lihue and Kalena, and also to the lonely pathway leading up to +Kalakini, on the Waimea side, there to lie in ambush for any lone +traveller, or belated person after la-i, aaho, or ferns. Such a one +would fall an easy prey to the Lo Aikanaka stalwarts, skilful in the +art of the _lua_ (to kill by breaking the bones). + +This went on for some time, until the unaccountable disappearance of +so many people began to be connected with the frequent entertainments +by the southern chief. Oahunui's subjects began to hint that their +young King had acquired the taste for human flesh at these feasts, +and that it was to gratify his unnatural appetite for the horrid dish +that he paid his frequent visits to those who were his inferiors, +contrary to all royal precedent. + +The people's disapproval of the intimacy of Oahunui with his new +friends was expressed more and more openly, and the murmurs of +discontent grew loud and deep. His chiefs and high priest became +alarmed, and begged him to discontinue his visits, or they would not +be answerable for the consequences. The King was thereby forced to +heed their admonitions and promised to keep away from Lo's, and did +so for quite a while. + +Now, all the male members of the royal family ate their meals with +the King when he was at home. This included, among others, Lehuanui, +his sister's husband, and their two sons--healthy, chubby little +lads of about eight and six years of age. One day after breakfast, +as the roar of the surf at Waialua could be distinctly heard, the +King remarked that the fish of Ukoa pond at Waialua must be pressing +on to the _makaha_ (floodgates) and he would like some aholehole. + +This observation really meant a command to his brother-in-law to go +and get the fish, as he was the highest chief present except his two +royal nephews, too small to assume such duties. + +Lehuanui, Kilikiliula's husband, accordingly went to Waialua with a +few of his own family retainers and a number of those belonging to the +King. They found the fish packed thick at the makaha, and were soon +busily engaged in scooping out, cleaning, and salting them. It was +quite late at night when Lehuanui, fatigued with the labors of the day, +lay down to rest. He had been asleep but a short time when he seemed +to see his two sons standing by his head. The eldest spoke to him: +"Why do you sleep, my father? While you are down here we are being +eaten by your brother-in-law, the King. We were cooked and eaten up, +and our skulls are now hanging in a net from a branch of the lehua-tree +you are called after, and the rest of our bones are tied in a bundle +and buried under the tree by the big root running to the setting sun." + +Then they seemed to fade away, and Lehuanui started up, shivering with +fear. He hardly knew whether he had been dreaming or had actually seen +an apparition of his little sons. He had no doubt they were dead, and +as he remembered all the talk and innuendoes about the King's supposed +reasons for visiting the strangers and the enforced cessation of those +visits at the urgent request of the high priest and the chiefs, he +came to the conclusion that the King had expressed a desire for fish +in his presence only to send him out of the way. He reasoned that no +doubt the King had noticed the chubby forms and rounded limbs of the +little lads, and being debarred a chance of partaking surreptitiously +of human flesh, had compelled his servants to kill, cook, and serve +up his own nephews. In satisfying his depraved appetite, he had also +got rid of two who might become formidable rivals; for it was quite +within the possibilities that the priests and chiefs in the near +future, should he be suspected of a desire for a further indulgence +in cannibal diet, might depose him, and proclaim either one of the +young nephews his successor. + +The father was so troubled that he aroused his immediate body servant, +and the two left Waialua for home shortly after midnight. They arrived +at the royal enclosure at dawn, and went first to the lehua-tree +spoken of by the apparition of the child, and on looking up amid the +branches, sure enough there dangled two little skulls in a large-meshed +fishing-net. Lehuanui then stooped down and scraped away the leaves +and loose dirt from the root indicated, and out rolled a bundle of +tapa, which on being opened was found to contain the bones of two +children. The father reached up for the net containing the skulls, and +putting the bundle of tapa in it, tied the net around his neck. The +servant stood by, a silent and grieved spectator of a scene whose +meaning he fully understood. + +The father procured a stone adze and went to the King's sleeping-house, +the servant still following. Here every one but an old woman tending +the kukui-nut candle was asleep. Oahunui was stretched out on a pile +of soft mats covered with his _paiula_, the royal red kapa of old. The +cruel wretch had eaten to excess of the hateful dish he craved, and +having accompanied it with copious draughts of awa juice, was in a +heavy, drunken sleep. + +Lehuanui stood over him, adze in hand, and called, "O King, where are +my children?" The stupefied King only stirred uneasily, and would not, +or could not, awake. Lehuanui called him three times, and the sight +of the drunken brute, gorged with his flesh and blood, so enraged +the father that he struck at Oahunui's neck with his stone adze, +and severed the head from the body at one blow. + +The father and husband then strode to his own sleeping-house, where +his wife lay asleep with their youngest child in her arms. He aroused +her and asked for his boys. The mother could only weep, without +answering. He upbraided her for her devotion to her brother, and for +having tamely surrendered her children to satisfy the appetite of the +inhuman monster. He reminded her that she had equal power with her +brother, and that the latter was very unpopular, and had she chosen to +resist his demands and called on the retainers to defend her children, +the King would have been killed and her children saved. + +He then informed her that, as she had given up his children to be +killed for her brother, he had killed him in retaliation, and, saying, +"You have preferred your brother to me and mine, so you will see no +more of me and mine," he tore the sleeping child from her arms and +turned to leave the house. + +The poor wife and mother followed, and, flinging herself on her +husband, attempted to detain him by clinging to his knees; but the +father, crazed by his loss and the thought of her greater affection +for a cruel, inhuman brother than for her own children, struck at her +with all his might, exclaiming, "Well, then, follow your brother," +and rushed away, followed by all his retainers. + +Kilikiliula fell on the side of the stream opposite to where the +lehua-tree stood, and is said to have turned to stone. The stone is +pointed out to this day, balanced on the hillside of the ravine formed +by the stream, and is one of the objects for the Hawaiian sightseer. + +The headless body of Oahunui lay where he was killed, abandoned by +every one. The story runs that in process of time it also turned to +stone, as a witness to the anger of the gods and their detestation of +his horrible crime. All the servants who had in any way been concerned, +in obedience to royal mandate, in killing and cooking the young +princes were, at the death of Kilikiliula, likewise turned to stone, +just as they were, in the various positions of crouching, kneeling, or +sitting. All the rest of the royal retainers, with the lesser chiefs +and guards, fled in fear and disgust from the place, and thus the +once sacred royal home of the Oahuan chiefs was abandoned and deserted. + +The great god Kane's curse, it is believed, still hangs over the +desolate spot, in proof of which it is asserted that, although all +this happened hundreds of years ago, no one has ever lived there since. + + + + +XIV + +AHUULA + +A LEGEND OF KANIKANIAULA AND THE FIRST FEATHER CLOAK + +_Mrs. E. M. Nakuina_ + + +Eleio was a _kukini_ (trained runner) in the service of Kakaalaneo, +King of Maui, several runners being always kept by each king or +_alii_ of consequence. These kukinis, when sent on any errand, always +took a direct line for their destination, climbing hills with the +agility of goats, jumping over rocks and streams, and leaping from +precipices. They were so fleet of foot that the common illustration +of the fact among the natives was the saying that when a kukini +was sent on an errand that would ordinarily take a day and a night, +fish wrapped in ki leaves (known as _lawalu_), if put on the fire on +his starting, would not be cooked sufficiently to be turned before +he would be back. Being so serviceable to the aliis, kukinis always +enjoyed a high degree of consideration, freedom, and immunity from +the strict etiquette and unwritten laws of a Hawaiian court. There +was hardly anything so valuable in their master's possession that +they could not have it if they wished. + +Eleio was sent to Hana to fetch awa for the King, and was expected to +be back in time for the King's supper. Kakaalaneo was then living at +Lahaina. Now, Eleio was not only a kukini, but he was also a kahuna, +and had been initiated in the ceremonies and observances by which he +was enabled to see spirits or wraiths, and was skilled in medicines, +charms, etc., and could return a wandering spirit to its body unless +decomposition had set in. + +Soon after leaving Olowalu, and as he commenced the ascent +of Aalaloloa, he saw a beautiful young woman ahead of him. He +naturally hastened his steps, intending to overtake such a charming +fellow-traveller; but, do what he would, she kept always just so +far ahead of him. Being the fleetest and most renowned kukini of +his time, it roused his professional pride to be outrun by a woman, +even if only for a short distance; so he was determined to catch +her, and he gave himself entirely to that effort. The young woman +led him a weary chase over rocks, hills, mountains, deep ravines, +precipices, and dark streams, till they came to the _Lae_ (cape) +of Hanamanuloa at Kahikinui, beyond Kaupo, when he caught her just +at the entrance to a _puoa_. A puoa was a kind of tower, generally +of bamboo, with a platform half-way up, on which the dead bodies of +persons of distinction belonging to certain families or classes were +exposed to the elements. + +When Eleio caught the young woman she turned to him and cried: "Let +me live! I am not human, but a spirit, and inside this inclosure is +my dwelling." + +He answered: "I have been aware for some time of your being a +spirit. No human being could have so outrun me." + +She then said: "Let us be friends. In yonder house live my parents +and relatives. Go to them and ask for a hog, kapas, some fine mats, +and a feather cloak. Describe me to them and tell them that I give all +those things to you. The feather cloak is unfinished. It is now only +a fathom and a half square, and was intended to be two fathoms. There +are enough feathers and netting in the house to finish it. Tell them +to finish it for you." The spirit then disappeared. + +Eleio entered the puoa, climbed on to the platform, and saw the dead +body of the girl. She was in every way as beautiful as the spirit +had appeared to him, and apparently decomposition had not yet set +in. He left the puoa and hurried to the house pointed out by the +spirit as that of her friends, and saw a woman wailing, whom, from +the resemblance, he at once knew to be the mother of the girl; so +he saluted her with an aloha. He then said: "I am a stranger here, +but I had a travelling companion who guided me to yonder puoa and +then disappeared." At these strange words the woman stopped wailing +and called to her husband, to whom she repeated what the stranger +had said. The latter then asked: "Does this house belong to you?" + +Husband and wife, wondering, answered at once: "It does." + +"Then," said Eleio, "my message is to you. My travelling companion +has a hog a fathom in length in your care; also a pile of fine kapas +of Paiula and others of fine quality; also a pile of mats and an +unfinished feather cloak, now a fathom and a half in length, which +you are to finish, the materials being in the house. All these things +she has given to me, and sent me to you for them." Then he began to +describe the young woman. Both parents recognized the truthfulness of +the description, and willingly agreed to give up the things which their +beloved daughter must have herself given away. But when they spoke of +killing the hog and making an _ahaaina_ (feast) for him, whom they had +immediately resolved to adopt as a son, he said: "Wait a little and +let me ask: Are all these people I see around this place your friends?" + +They both answered: "They are our relatives--uncles, aunts, and +cousins to the spirit, who seems to have adopted you either as husband +or brother." + +"Will they do your bidding in everything?" he asked. + +They answered that they could be relied upon. He directed them to +build a large _lanai_, or arbor, to be entirely covered with ferns, +ginger, maile, and ieie--the sweet and odorous foliage greens of +the islands. An altar was to be erected at one end of the lanai and +appropriately decorated. The order was willingly carried out, men, +women, and children working with a will, so that the whole structure +was finished in a couple of hours. + +Eleio now directed the hog to be cooked. He also ordered cooked +red and white fish, red, white, and black cocks, and bananas of the +lele and maoli varieties, to be placed on the altar. He ordered all +women and children to enter their houses and to assist him with their +prayers; all pigs, chickens, and dogs to be tied in dark huts to keep +them quiet, and that the most profound silence should be kept. The +men at work were asked to remember their gods, and to invoke their +assistance for Eleio. He then started for Hana, pulled up a couple +of bushes of awa of Kaeleku, famous for its medicinal properties, +and was back again before the hog was cooked. The awa was prepared, +and when the preparations for the feast were complete and set out, +he offered everything to his gods and begged assistance in what he +was about to perform. + +It seems the spirit of the girl had been lingering near him all +the time, seeming to be attached to him, but of course invisible +to every one. When Eleio had finished his invocation he turned and +caught the spirit, and, holding his breath and invoking the gods, +he hurried to the puoa, followed by the parents, who now began to +understand that he was going to try the _kapuku_ (or restoration to +life of the dead) on their daughter. Arriving at the puoa, he placed +the spirit against the insteps of the girl and pressed it firmly in, +meanwhile continuing his invocation. The spirit entered its former +tenement kindly enough until it came to the knees, when it refused +to go any further, as from there it could perceive that the stomach +was beginning to decompose, and it did not want to be exposed to +the pollution of decaying matter. But Eleio, by the strength of his +prayers, was enabled to push the spirit up past the knees till it +came to the thigh bones, when the refractory spirit again refused to +proceed. He had to put additional fervor into his prayers to overcome +the spirit's resistance, and it proceeded up to the throat, when there +was some further check; by this time the father, mother, and male +relatives were all grouped around anxiously watching the operation, +and they all added the strength of their petitions to those of Eleio, +which enabled him to push the spirit past the neck, when the girl +gave a sort of crow. There was now every hope of success, and all +the company renewed their prayers with redoubled vigor. The spirit +made a last feeble resistance at the elbows and wrists, which was +triumphantly overborne by the strength of the united prayers. Then +it quietly submitted, took complete possession of the body, and +the girl came to life. She was submitted to the usual ceremonies +of purification by the local priest, after which she was led to +the prepared lanai, when kahuna, maid, parents, and relatives had a +joyous reunion. Then they feasted on the food prepared for the gods, +who were only supposed to absorb the spiritual essence of things, +leaving the grosser material parts to their devotees, who, for the +time being, are considered their guests. + +After the feast the feather cloak, kapas, and fine mats were brought +and displayed to Eleio; and the father said to him: "Take the woman +thou hast restored and have her for wife, and remain here with us; you +will be our son and will share equally in the love we have for her." + +But our hero, with great self-denial and fidelity, said: "No, I accept +her as a charge, but for wife, she is worthy to be one for a higher +than I. If you will trust her to me, I will take her to my master, +for by her beauty and charms she is worthy to be the queen of our +lovely island." + +The father answered: "She is yours to do with as you will. It is as +if you had created her, for without you, where would she be now? We +only ask this, that you always remember that you have parents and +relatives here, and a home whenever you choose." + +Eleio then asked that the feather cloak be finished for him before he +returned to his master. All who could work at feathers set about it +at once, including the fair girl restored to life; and he now learned +that she was called Kanikaniaula. + +When it was completed he set out on his return to Lahaina accompanied +by the girl, and taking the feather cloak and the remaining awa he +had not used in his incantations. They travelled slowly according +to the strength of Kanikaniaula, who now in the body could not equal +the speed she had displayed as a spirit. + +Arriving at Launiupoko, Eleio turned to her and said: "You wait and +hide here in the bushes while I go on alone. If by sundown I do not +return, I shall be dead. You know the road by which we came; then +return to your people. But if all goes well with me I shall be back +in a little while." + +He then went on alone, and when he reached Makila, on the confines of +Lahaina, he saw a number of people heating an _imu_, or underground +oven. On perceiving him they started to bind and roast him alive, +such being the orders of the King, but he ordered them away with the +request, "Let me die at the feet of my master." And thus he passed +successfully the imu heated for him. + +When he finally stood before Kakaalaneo, the latter said to him: +"How is this? Why are you not cooked alive, as I ordered? How came +you to pass my lunas?" + +The kukini answered: "It was the wish of the slave to die at the feet +of his master, if die he must; but if so, it would be an irreparable +loss to you, my master, for I have that with me that will cause your +name to be renowned and handed down to posterity." + +"And what is that?" questioned the King. + +Eleio then unrolled his bundle and displayed to the astonished gaze +of the King and courtiers the glories of a feather cloak, before +then unheard of on the islands. Needless to say, he was immediately +pardoned and restored to royal favor, and the awa he had brought from +Hana was reserved for the King's special use in his offerings to the +gods that evening. + +When the King heard the whole story of Eleio's absence, and that the +fair original owner was but a short way off, he ordered her to be +immediately brought before him that he might express his gratitude +for the wonderful garment. When she arrived, he was so struck with her +beauty and modest deportment that he ask her to become his Queen. Thus, +some of the highest chiefs of the land traced their descent from +Kakaalaneo and Kanikaniaula. The original feather cloak, known as the +"_Ahu o Kakaalaneo_," is said to be in the possession of the Pauahi +Bishop Museum. At one time it was used on state occasions as _pa-u_, +or skirt, by Princess Nahienaena, own sister of the second and third +Kamehame-has. + +The ahuulas of the ancient Hawaiians were of fine netting, entirely +covered, with feathers woven in. These were either of one color and +kind or two or three different colors outlining patterns. The feathers +were knotted by twos or threes with twisted strands of the olona, the +process being called _uo_. They were then woven into the foundation +netting previously made the exact shape and size wanted. The whole +process of feather cloak making was laborious and intricate, and +the making of a cloak took a great many years. And as to durability, +let the cloak of Kalaalaneo, now several centuries old, attest. + + + + +XV + +KAALA AND KAAIALII + +A LEGEND OF LANAI + +_W. M. Gibson_ + + +Bordering upon the land of Kealia, on the southwest coast of Lanai, +where was _pahonua_ or place of refuge, are the remains of Kaunolu, an +ancient _heiau_, or temple. Its ruins lie within the mouth of a deep +ravine, whose extending banks run out into the sea and form a bold, +bluff-bound bay. On the top of the western bank there is a stone-paved +platform, called the _kuaha_. Outside of this, and separated by a +narrow alley-way, there runs a broad high wall, which quite encircles +the kuaha. Other walls and structures lead down the bank, and the +slope is terraced and paved down to the tide-worn stones of the shore. + +At the beach there is a break; a great block of the bluff has been rent +away by some convulsion of nature, and stands out like a lone tower, +divided from the main by a gulf of the sea. Its high walls beetle from +their tops, upon which neither man nor goat can climb. But you can +behold on the flat summit of this islet bluff, portions of ancient +work, of altars and walls, and no doubt part of the mainland temple, +to which this fragment once was joined. But man can visit this lone +tower's top no more, and his feet can never climb its overhanging +walls. + +Inland from the temple there are many remains of the huts of the +people of the past. The stone foundations, the inclosures for swine, +the round earth ovens, and other traces of a throng of people cover +many acres of beach and hillside. This was a town famed as an abode of +gods and a refuge for those who fled for their lives; but it drew its +people mainly through the fame of its fishing-ground, which swarmed +with the varied life of the Hawaiian seas. + +To this famed fishing-ground came the great hero of Hawaii to tax +the deep, when he had subdued this and the other isles. He came with +his fleets of war canoes; with his faithful _koas_, or fighting men, +with his chiefs, and priests, and women, and their trains. He had a +house here. Upon the craggy bluff that forms the eastern bank of the +bay there is a lonely _pa_, or wall, and stones of an ancient fort, +overlooking the temple, town, and bay. + +Kamehameha came to Kealia for sport rather than for worship. Who so +loved to throw the maika ball, or hurl the spear, or thrust aside the +many javelins flung at his naked chest, as the chief of Kohala? He +rode gladly on the crest of the surf waves. He delighted to drive his +canoe alone out into the storm. He fought with the monsters of the +deep, as well as with men. He captured the great shark that abounds +in the bay, and he would clutch in the fearful grip of his hands the +deadly eel or snake of these seas, the terror of fishes and men. + +When this warrior king came to Kaunolu, the islanders thronged to +the shore to pay homage to the great chief, and to lay at the feet +of their sovereign, as was their wont, the products of the isle: +the taro, the yam, the hala, the cocoanut, ohelo, banana, and sweet +potato. They piled up a mound of food before the door of the King's +pakui, along with a clamorous multitude of fat poi-fed dogs, and of +fathom-long swine. + +Besides this tribute of the men, the workers of the land, the women +filled the air with the sweet odors of their floral offerings. The +maidens were twined from head to waist with _leis_ or wreaths of +the _na-u_, which is Lanai's own lovely jessamine--a rare gardenia, +whose sweet aroma loads the breeze, and leads you to the bush when +seeking it afar off. These garlands were fastened to the plaited pili +thatch of the King's pakui; they were placed on the necks of the young +warriors, who stood around the chief; and around his royal brows they +twined an odorous crown of maile. + +The brightest of the girlish throng who stood before the dread Lord +of the Isles was Kaala, or Sweet Scented, whose fifteen suns had just +burnished her sweet brown face with a soft golden gloss; and her large, +round, tender eyes knew yet no wilting fires. Her neck and arms, and +all of her young body not covered by the leafy pa-u, was tinted with +a soft sheen like unto a rising moon. Her skin glowed with the glory +of youth, and mingled its delicate odor of health with the blooms of +the groves, so that the perfume of her presence received fittingly +the name of Fragrance. + +In those rude days the island race was sound and clean. The supple +round limbs were made bright and strong by the constant bath and the +temperate breeze. They were not cumbered with clothing; they wore no +long, sweating gowns, but their smooth, shining skins reflected back +their sun, which gave them such a rich and dusky charm. + +Perhaps such a race cannot long wear all our gear and live. They are +best clothed with sea foam, or with the garlands of their groves. How +sweetly blend the brown and green; and when young, soft, amber-tinted +cheeks, glowing with the crimson tide beneath, are wreathed with +the odorous evergreens of the isles, you see the poesy of our kind, +and the sweet, wild grace that dwelt in the Eden Paradise. + +The sweet Kaala stood mindless of harm, as the playful breeze rustled +the long blades of the la-i (_dracaena_) leaves, hanging like a bundle +of green swords from her waist; and as they twirled and fluttered in +the air, revealed the soft, rounded form, whose charm filled the eye +and heart of one who stood among the braves of the great chief--the +heart of the stout young warrior Kaaialii. + +This youth had fought in the battle of Maunalei, Lanai's last bloody +fight. With his long-reaching spear, wielded with sinewy arms, he urged +the flying foe to the top of a fearful cliff, and mocking the cries of +a huddled crowd of panic-scared men, drove them with thrusts and shouts +till they leaped like frightened sheep into the jaws of the deep, +dark chasm, and their torn corpses strewed the jagged stones below. + +Kaaialii, like many a butcher of his kind, was comely to see. With the +lion's heart, he had the lion's tawny hue. A swart grace beamed beneath +his curling brows. He had the small, firm hand to throttle or caress, +and eyes full of fire for hate or love; and love's flame now lit the +face of the hero of the bloody leap, and to his great chief he said, +"O King of all the isles, let this sweet flower be mine, rather than +the valley thou gavest me for my domain." + +Said Kamehameha: "You shall plant the Lanai jessamine in the valley +I gave you in Kohala. But there is another who claims our daughter, +who is the stout bone-breaker, the scarred Mailou. My spearman of +Maunalei can have no fear; and you shall wrestle with him; and let +the one whose arms can clasp the girl after the fight carry her to +his house, where one kapa shall cover the two." + +The poor maid, the careless gift of savage power, held up her clasped +hands with a frightened gesture at the dread name of the breaker of +bones; for she had heard how he had sucked the breath of many a dainty +bloom like her, then crunched the wilted blossom with sinews of hate, +and flung it to the sharks. + +And the Lanai maiden loved the young chief of Hawaii. He had indeed +pierced her people, but only the tender darts of his eyes had wounded +her. Turning to him, she looked her savage, quick, young love, and +said, "O Kaaialii, may thy grip be as sure as thy thrust. Save me +from the bloody virgin-eater, and I will catch the squid and beat +the kapa for thee all my days." + +The time of contest approached. The King sat under the shade of a +leafy _kou_, the royal tree of the olden time, which has faded away +with the chiefs it once did shelter. On the smooth shell floor, +covered with the hala mat, stood the bare-limbed braves, stripped +to the malo, who with hot eyes of hate shot out their rage of lust +and blood, and stretched out their strangling arms. They stood, +beating with heavy fists their broad, glossy chests of bronze, and +grinning face to face, they glowered their savage wish to kill. Then, +with right foot advanced, and right arm uplifted, they pause to shout +their gage of battle, and tell to each how they would maim and tear, +and kill, and give each other's flesh for food to some beastly maw. + +And now, each drawing near to each, with arms uplifted, and outspread +palms with sinewy play, like nervy claws trying to clutch or grip, +they seek a chance for a deadly clinch. And swift the scarred +child-strangler has sprung with his right to the young spear-man's +throat, who as quickly hooks the lunging arm within the crook of his, +and with quick, sledge-like blow breaks the shoulder arm-bone. + +With fury the baffled bone-breaker grips with the uncrippled hand; +but now two stout young arms, tense with rage, soon twist and break +the one unaided limb. Then with limp arms the beaten brute turns to +flee; but swift hate is upon him, and clutches him by the throat; and +pressing him down, the hero of Kaala holds his knee to the hapless +wretch's back, and with knee bored into the backward bended spine, +he strains and jerks till the jointed bones snap and break, and the +dread throttler of girls and babes lies prone on the mat, a broken +and bloody corpse. + +"Good!" cried the King. "Our son has the strength of Kanekoa. Now let +our daughter soothe the limbs of her lover. Let her stroke his skin, +press his joints, and knead his back with the loving grip and touch +of the lomilomi. We will have a great bake, with the hula and song; +and when the feast is over, then shall they be one." + +A line of women squat down. They crone their wild refrain, praising +the one who wins in strife and love. They seize in their right hand +the hula gourd, clattering with pebbles inside. They whirl it aloft, +they shake, they swing, they strike their palms, they thump the mat; +and now with supple joints they twirl their loins, and with heave +and twist, and with swing and song, the savage dance goes on. + +Kaala stood up with the maiden throng, the tender, guarded gifts of +kings. They twined their wreaths, they swayed, and posed their shining +arms; and flapping with their hands their leafy skirts, revealed their +rounded limbs. This fires the gaze of men, and the hero of the day with +flaming eyes, springs and clasps his love, crying as he bears her away: +"Thou shalt dance in my hut in Kohala for me alone, forever!" + +At this, a stout yet grizzled man of the isle lifts up his voice and +wails: "Kaala, my child, is gone. Who shall soothe my limbs when I +return from spearing the ohua? And who shall feed me with taro and +breadfruit like the chief of Olowalu, when I have no daughter to give +away? I must hide from the chief or I die." And thus wailed out Opunui, +the father of Kaala. + +But a fierce hate stirred the heart of Opunui. His friend was driven +over the cliff at Maunalei, and he himself had lived only by crawling +at the feet of the slayer. He hid his hate, and planned to save +his girl and balk the killer of his people. He said in his heart, +"I will hide her in the sea, and none but the fish gods and I shall +know where the ever-sounding surf surges over Kaala." + +Now, in the morn, when the girl with ruddy brown cheeks, and glowing +with the brightening dawn of love, stood in the doorway of the lodge +of her lord, and her face was sparkling with the sheen from the sun, +her sire in humble guise stood forth and said, "My child, your mother +at Mahana is dying. Pray you, my lord, your love, that you may see +her once more before his canoe shall bear you to his great land." + +"Alas!" said the tender child, "since when is Kalani ill? I shall +carry to her this large sweet fish speared by my lord; and when I have +rubbed her aching limbs, she will be well again with the love touch +of her child. Yes, my lord will let me go. Will you not, O Kaaialii; +will you not let me go to give my mother a last embrace, and I shall +be back again before the moon has twice spanned the bay?" + +The hero clasped his young love with one stout twining arm, and gazing +into her eyes, he with a caressing hand put back from her brow her +shining hair, and thus to his heart's life he spoke: "O my sweet +flower, how shall I live without thee, even for this day's march of +the sun? For thou art my very breath, and I shall pant and die like +a stranded fish without thee. But no, let me not say so. Kaaialii is +a chief who has fought men and sharks; and he must not speak like +a girl. He too loves his mother, who looks for him in the valley +of Kohala; and shall he deny thy mother, to look her last upon the +sweet face and the tender limbs that she fed and reared for him? Go, +my Kaala. But thy chief will sit and watch with a hungering heart, +till thou come back to his arms again." + +And the pretty jessamine twined her arms around his neck, and laying +her cheek upon his breast said, with upturned tender glances, "O my +chief, who gavest me life and sweet joy; thy breath is my breath; +thy eyes are my sweetest sight; thy breast is my only resting-place; +and when I go away, I shall all the way look back to thee, and go +slowly with a backward turned heart; but when I return to thee, +I shall have wings to bear me to my lord." + +"Yes, my own bird," said Kaaialii, "thou must fly, but fly swiftly +in thy going as well as in thy coming; for both ways thou fliest to +me. When thou art gone I shall spear the tender ohua fish, I shall bake +the yam and banana, and I will fill the calabash with sweet water, +to feed thee, my heart, when thou shalt come; and thou shalt feed me +with thy loving eyes. + +"Here, Opunui! take thy child. Thou gavest life to her, but now she +gives life to me. Bring her back all well, ere the sun has twice +risen. If she come not soon, I shall die; but I should slay thee +before I die; therefore, O Opunui, hasten thy going and thy coming, +and bring back my life and love to me." + +And now the stern hero unclasped the weeping girl. His eye was calm, +but his shut lips showed the work within of a strong and tender heart +of love. He felt the ache of a larger woe than this short parting. He +pressed the little head between his palms; he kissed the sobbing lips +again and again; he gave one strong clasp, heart to heart, and then +quickly strode away. + +As Kaala tripped along the stony up-hill path, she glanced backward +on her way, to get glimpses of him she loved, and she beheld her +chief standing on the topmost rock of the great bluff overhanging the +sea. And still as she went and looked, still there he stood; and when +on the top of the ridge and about to descend into the great valley, +she turned to look her last, still she saw her loving lord looking +up to her. + +The silent sire and the weeping child soon trod the round, green vale +of Palawai. She heeded not now to pluck, as was her wont, the flowers +in her path; but thought how she should stop a while, as she came +back, to twine a wreath for her dear lord's neck. And thus this sad +young love tripped along with innocent hope by the moody Opunui's side. + +They passed through the groves of Kalulu and Kumoku, and then the +man swerved from the path leading to Mahana and turned his face again +seaward. At this the sad and silent child looked up into the face of +her grim and sullen sire and said: "O father, we shall not find mother +on this path, but we shall lose our way and come to the sea once more." + +"And thy mother is by the sea, by the bay of Kaumalapau. There +she gathers limpets on the rocks. She has dried a large squid for +thee. She has pounded some taro and filled her calabash with poi, +and would feed thee once more. She is not sick; but had I said she +was well, thy lord would not have let thee go; but now thou art on +the way to sleep with thy mother by the sea." + +The poor weary girl now trudged on with a doubting heart. She glanced +sadly at her dread sire's moody eye. Silent and sore she trod the stony +path leading down to the shore, and when she came to the beach with +naught in view but the rocks and sea, she said with a bursting heart, +"O my father, is the shark to be my mother, and I to never see my +dear chief any more?" + +"Hear the truth," cried Opunui. "Thy home for a time is indeed in the +sea, and the shark shall be thy mate, but he shall not harm thee. Thou +goest down where the sea god lives, and he shall tell thee that the +accursed chief of the bloody leap shall not carry away any daughter +of Lanai. When Kaaialii has sailed for Kohala then shall the chief +of Olowalu come and bring thee to earth again." + +As the fierce sire spoke, he seized the hand of Kaala, and unheeding +her sobs and cries, led her along the rugged shore to a point eastward +of the bay, where the beating sea makes the rocky shore tremble beneath +the feet. Here was a boiling gulf, a fret and foam of the sea, a roar +of waters, and a mighty jet of brine and spray from a spouting cave +whose mouth lay deep beneath the battling tide. + +See yon advancing billow! The south wind sends it surging along. It +rears its combing, whitening crest, and with mighty, swift-rushing +volume of angry green sea, it strikes the mouth of the cave; it drives +and packs the pent-up air within, and now the tightened wind rebounds, +and driving back the ramming sea, bursts forth with a roar as the +huge spout of sea leaps upward to the sky, and then comes curving +down in gentle silver spray. + +The fearful child now clasped the knees of her savage sire. "Not there, +O father," she sobbed and wailed. "The sea snake (the _puhi_) has his +home in the cave, and he will bite and tear me, and ere I die, the +crawling crabs will creep over me and pick out my weeping eyes. Alas, +O father, better give me to the shark, and then my cry and moan will +not hurt thine ear." + +Opunui clasped the slender girl with one sinewy arm, and with a +bound he leaped into the frothed and fretted pool below. Downward +with a dolphin's ease he moved, and with his free arm beating back +the brine, moved along the ocean bed into the sea cave's jagged jaws; +and then stemming with stiffened sinew the wind-driven tide, he swam +onward till he struck a sunless beach and then stood inside the cave, +whose mouth is beneath the sea. + +Here was a broad, dry space with a lofty, salt-icicled roof. The +green, translucent sea, as it rolled back and forth at their feet, +gave to their brown faces a ghastly white glare. The scavenger crabs +scrambled away over the dank and dripping stones, and the loathsome +biting eel, slowly reached out its well-toothed, wide-gaping jaw to +tear the tender feet that roused it from its horrid lair, where the +dread sea god dwelt. + +The poor hapless girl sank down upon this gloomy shore and cried, +clinging to the kanaka's knee: "O father, beat out my brains with +this jagged stone, and do not let the eel twine around my neck, and +trail with a loathsome, slimy, creeping crawl over my body before I +die. Oh! the crabs will pick and tear me before my breath is gone." + +"Listen," said Opunui. "Thou shalt go back with me to the warm sunny +air. Thou shalt tread again the sweet-smelling flowery vale of Palawai, +and twine thy neck with wreaths of scented jessamine, if thou wilt +go with me to the house of the chief of Olowalu and there let thy +bloody lord behold thee wanton with thy love in another chief's arms." + +"Never," shouted the lover of Kaaialii, "never will I meet any clasp +of love but that of my own chief. If I cannot lay my head again upon +his breast, I will lay it in death upon these cold stones. If his +arm shall never again draw me to his heart, then let the eel twine my +neck and let him tear away my cheeks rather than that another beside +my dear lord shall press my face." + +"Then let the eel be thy mate," cried Opunui, as he roughly unclasped +the tender arms twined around his knees; "until the chief of Olowalu +comes to seize thee, and carry thee to his house in the hills of +Maui. Seek not to leave the cave. Thou knowest that with thy weak +arms, thou wilt tear thyself against the jagged rocks in trying to +swim through the swift flowing channel. Stay till I send for thee, +and live." Then dashing out into the foaming gulf with mighty buffeting +arms he soon reached the upper air. + +And Kaaialii stood upon the bluff, looking up to the hillside path +by which his love had gone, long after her form was lost to view in +the interior vales. And after slight sleep upon his mat, and walking +by the shore that night, he came at dawn and climbed the bluff again +to watch his love come down the hill. And as he gazed he saw a leafy +skirt flutter in the wind, and his heart fluttered to clasp his little +girl; but as a curly brow drew near, his soul sank to see it was not +his love, but her friend Ua (rain) with some sad news upon her face. + +With hot haste and eager asking eyes does the love-lorn chief meet the +maiden messenger, and cries, "Why does Kaala delay in the valley? Has +she twined wreaths for another's neck for me to break? Has a wild +hog torn her? Or has the anaana prayer of death struck her heart, +and does she lie cold on the sod of Mahana? Speak quickly, for thy +face kills me, O Ua!" + +"Not thus, my lord," said the weeping girl, as the soft shower fell +from Ua's sweet eyes. "Thy love is not in the valley; and she has +not reached the hut of her mother Kalani. But kanakas saw from the +hills of Kalulu her father lead her through the forest of Kumoku; +since then our Kaala has not been seen, and I fear has met some fate +that is to thwart thy love." + +"Kaala lost? The blood of my heart is gone!" He hears no more! The +fierce chief, hot with baffled passion, strikes madly at the air, +and dashes away, onward up the stony hill; and upward with his stout +young savage thews, he bounds along without halt or slack of speed +till he reaches the valley's rim, then rushes down its slopes. + +He courses over its bright green plains. He sees in the dusty path some +prints that must be those of the dear feet he follows now. His heart +feels a fresh bound; he feels neither strain of limb nor scantness +of breath, and, searching as he runs, he descries before him in the +plain the deceitful sire alone. + +"Opunui," he cries, "give me Kaala, or thy life!" The stout, gray +kanaka looks to see the face of flame and the outstretched arms, +and stops not to try the strength of his own limbs, or to stay for +any parley, but flies across the valley, along the very path by which +the fierce lover came; and with fear to spur him on, he keeps well +before his well blown foe. + +But Kaaialii is now a god; he runs with new strung limbs, and presses +hard this fresh-footed runner of many a race. They are within two +spears' length of each other's grip upon the rim of the vale; and +hot with haste the one, and with fear the other, they dash along the +rugged path of Kealia, and rush downward to the sea. They bound o'er +the fearful path of clinkers. Their torn feet heed not the pointed +stones. The elder seeks the shelter of the taboo; and now, both +roused by the outcries of a crowd that swarm on the bluffs around, +they put forth their remaining strength and strive who shall gain +first the entrance to the sacred wall of refuge. + +For this the hunted sire strains his fast failing nerve; and the +youth with a shout quickens his still tense limbs. He is within a +spear's length; he stretches out his arms. Ha, old man! he has thy +throat within his grip. But no, the greased neck slips the grasp; +the wretch leaps for his dear life, he gains the sacred wall, he +bounds inside, and the furious foe is stopped by the staves of priests. + +The baffled chief lies prone in the dust, and curses the gods and +the sacred taboo. After a time he is led away to his hut by friends; +and then the soothing hands of Ua rub and knead the soreness out +of his limbs. And when she has set the calabash of poi before him +along with the relishing dry squid, and he has filled himself and +is strong again, he will not heed any entreaty of chief or friends; +not even the caressing lures of Ua, who loves him; but he says, +"I will go and seek Kaala; and if I find her not, I die." + +Again the love-lorn chief seeks the inland. He shouts the name of +his lost love in the groves of Kumoku, and throughout the forest of +Mahana. Then he roams through the cloud-canopied valley of Palawai; +he searches among the wooded canyons of Kalulu, and he wakes the +echoes with the name of Kaala in the gorge of the great ravine +of Maunalei. He follows this high walled barranca over its richly +flowered and shaded floor; and also along by the winding stream, +until he reaches its source, an abrupt wall of stone, one hundred feet +high, and forming the head of the ravine. From the face of this steep, +towering rock, there exudes a sweet, clear rain, a thousand trickling +rills of rock-filtered water leaping from points of fern and moss, +and filling up an ice cold pool below, at which our weary chief gladly +slaked his thirst. The hero now clambers the steep walls of the gorge, +impassable to the steps of men in these days; but he climbs with toes +thrust in crannies, or resting on short juts and points of rock; and +he pulls himself upward by grasping at out-cropping bushes and strong +tufts of fern. And thus with stout sinew and bold nerve the fearless +spearman reaches the upper land from whence he had, in his day of +devouring rage, hurled and driven headlong the panic-stricken foe. + +And now he runs on over the lands of Paomai, through the wooded dells +of the gorge of Kaiholena, and onward across Kaunolu and Kalulu, +until he reaches the head spring of sacred Kealia called Waiakekua; +and here he gathered bananas and ohelo berries; and as he stayed his +hunger with the pleasant wild fruit, he beheld a white-haired priest +of Kaunolu, bearing a calabash of water. + +The aged priest feared the stalwart chief, because he was not upon his +own sacred ground, under the safe wing of the taboo; and therefore +he bowed low and clasped the stout knees, and offered the water to +slake the thirst of the sorrowing chief. But Kaaialii cried out: +"I thirst not for water, but for the sight of my love. Tell me where +she is hid, and I will bring thee hogs and men for the gods." And to +this the glad priest replied: + +"Son of the stout spear! I know thou seekest the sweet Flower of +Palawai; and no man but her sire has seen her resting-place; but I +know that thou seekest in vain in the groves, and in the ravines, +and in this mountain. Opunui is a great diver and has his dens in the +sea. He leaves the shore when no one follows, and he sleeps with the +fish gods, and thou wilt find thy love in some cave of the rock-bound +southern shore." + +The chief quickly turns his face again seaward. He descends the deep +shaded pathway of the ravine of Kaunolu. He winds his way through +shaded thickets of ohia, sandalwood, the yellow mamani, the shrub +violet, and the fragrant na-u. He halted not as he reached the plain +of Palawai, though the ever overhanging canopy of cloud that shades +this valley of the mountain cooled his weary feet. These upper +lands were still, and no voice was heard by the pili grass huts, +and the maika balls and the wickets of the bowling alley of Palawai +stood untouched, because all the people were with the great chief by +the shore of Kaunolu; and Kaaialii thought that he trod the flowery +pathway of the still valley alone. + +But there was one who, in soothing his strained limbs after he fell by +the gateway of the temple, had planted strong love in her own heart; +and she, Ua, with her lithe young limbs, had followed this sorrowing +lord through all his weary tramp, even through the gorges, and over +the ramparts of the hills, and she was near the sad, wayworn chief +when he reached the southern shore. + +The weary hero only stayed his steps when he reached the brow of the +great bluff of Palikaholo. The sea broke many hundred feet below where +he stood. The gulls and screaming boatswain birds sailed in mid-air +between his perch and the green waves. He looked up the coast to his +right, and saw the lofty, wondrous sea columns of Honopu. He looked +to the left, and beheld the crags of Kalulu, but nowhere could he +see any sign which should tell him where his love was hid away. + +His strong, wild nature was touched by the distant sob and moan +of the surf. It sang a song for his sad, savage soul. It roused up +before his eyes other eyes, and lips, and cheeks, and clasps of tender +arms. His own sinewy ones he now stretched out wildly in the mocking +air. He groaned, and sobbed, and beat his breast as he cried out, +"Kaala! O Kaala! Where art thou? Dost thou sleep with the fish gods, +or must I go to join thee in the great shark's maw?" + +As the sad hero thought of this dread devourer of many a tender +child of the isles, he hid his face with his hands,--looking with +self-torture upon the image of his soft young love, crunched, bloody +and shrieking, in the jaws of the horrid god of the Hawaiian seas; +and as he thought and waked up in his heart the memories of his love, +he felt that he must seek her even in her gory grave in the sea. + +Then he looks forth again, and as he gazes down by the shore his +eyes rest upon the spray of the blowing cave near Kaumalapau. It +leaps high with the swell which the south wind sends. The white mist +gleams in the sun. Shifting forms and shades are seen in the varied +play of the up-leaping cloud. And as with fevered soul he glances, +he sees a form spring up in the ever bounding spray. + +He sees with his burning eyes the lines of the sweet form that twines +with tender touch around his soul. He sees the waving hair, that +mingles on his neck with his own swart curls. He sees,--he thinks he +sees,--in the leap and play of sun-tinted spray, his love, his lost +Kaala; and with hot foot he rushes downward to the shore. + +He stands upon the point of rock whence Opunui sprang. He feels the +throb beneath his feet of the beating, bounding tide. He sees the fret +and foam of the surging gulf below the leaping spray, and is wetted +by the shore-driven mist. He sees all of this wild, working water, +but he does not see Kaala. + +And yet he peers into this mad surf for her he seeks. The form that +he has seen still leads him on. He will brave the sea god's wrath; +and he fain would cool his brow of flame in the briny bath. He thinks +he hears a voice sounding down within his soul; and cries, "Where art +thou, O Kaala? I come, I come!" And as he cries, he springs into the +white, foaming surge of this ever fretted sea. + +And one was near as the hero sprang; even Ua, with the clustering +curls. She loved the chief; she did hope that when his steps were +stayed by the sea, and he had mingled his moan with the wild waters' +wail, that he would turn once more to the inland groves, where she +would twine him wreaths, and soothe his limbs, and rest his head upon +her knees; but he has leaped for death, he comes up no more. And +Ua wailed for Kaaialii; and as the chief rose no more from out the +lashed and lathered sea, she cried out, "_Auwe ka make_!" (Alas, +he is dead!) And thus wailing and crying out, and tearing her hair, +she ran back over the bluffs, and down the shore to the tabooed ground +of Kealia, and wailing ever, flung herself at the feet of Kamehameha. + +The King was grieved to hear from Ua of the loss of his young +chief. But the priest Papalua standing near, said: "O Chief of Heaven, +and of all the isles; there where Kaaialii has leaped is the sea den +of Opunui, and as thy brave spearman can follow the turtle to his +deep sea nest, he will see the mouth of the cave, and in it, I think, +he will find his lost love, Kaala, the flower of Palawai." + +At this Ua roused up. She called to her brother Keawe, and laying +hold on him, pulled him toward the shore, crying out, "To thy canoe, +quick! I will help thee to paddle to Kaumalapau." For thus she could +reach the cave sooner than by the way of the bluffs. And the great +chief also following, sprang into his swiftest canoe, and helping +as was his wont, plunged his blade deep into the swelling tide, +and bounded along by the frowning shore of Kumoku. + +When Kaaialii plunged beneath the surging waters, he became at once +the searching diver of the Hawaiian seas; and as his keen eye peered +throughout the depths, he saw the portals of the ocean cave into +which poured the charging main. He then, stemming with easy play of +his well-knit limbs the suck and rush of the sea, shot through the +current of the gorge; and soon stood up upon the sunless strand. + +At first he saw not, but his ears took in at once a sad and piteous +moan,--a sweet, sad moan for his hungry ear, of the voice of her he +sought. And there upon the cold, dank, dismal floor he could dimly +see his bleeding, dying love. Quickly clasping and soothing her, he +lifted her up to bear her to the upper air; but the moans of his poor +weak Kaala told him she would be strangled in passing through the sea. + +And as he sat down, and held her in his arms, she feebly spoke: "O my +chief, I can die now! I feared that the fish gods would take me, and +I should never see thee more. The eel bit me, and the crabs crawled +over me, and when I dared the sea to go and seek thee, my weak arms +could not fight the tide; I was torn against the jaws of the cave, +and this and the fear of the gods have so hurt me, that I must die." + +"Not so, my love," said the sad and tearful chief. "I am with thee +now. I give thee the warmth of my heart. Feel my life in thine. Live, +O my Kaala, for me. Come, rest and be calm, and when thou canst hold +thy breath I will take thee to the sweet air again, and to thy valley, +where thou shalt twine wreaths for me." And thus with fond words and +caresses he sought to soothe his love. + +But the poor girl still bled as she moaned; and with fainter voice +she said, "No, my chief, I shall never twine a wreath, but only my +arms once more around thy neck." And feebly clasping him, she said +in sad, sobbing, fainting tones, "Aloha, my sweet lord! Lay me among +the flowers by Waiakeakua, and do not slay my father." + +Then, breathing moans and murmurs of love, she lay for a time weak +and fainting upon her lover's breast, with her arms drooping by her +side. But all at once she clasps his neck, and with cheek to cheek, +she clings, she moans, she gasps her last throbs of love and passes +away; and her poor torn corse lies limp within the arms of the +love-lorn chief. + +As he cries out in his woe there are other voices in the cave. First +he hears the voice of Ua speaking to him in soothing tones as she +stoops to the body of her friend; and then in a little while he hears +the voice of his great leader calling to him and bidding him stay +his grief. "O King of all the Seas," said Kaaialii, standing up and +leaving Kaala to the arms of Ua, "I have lost the flower thou gavest +me; it is broken and dead, and I have no more joy in life." + +"What!" said Kamehameha, "art thou a chief, and wouldst cast away life +for a girl? Here is Ua, who loves thee; she is young and tender like +Kaala. Thou shalt have her, and more, if thou dost want. Thou shalt +have, besides the land I gave thee in Kohala, all that thou shalt +ask of Lanai. Its great valley of Palawai shall be thine; and thou +shalt watch my fishing grounds of Kaunolu, and be the Lord of Lanai." + +"Hear, O King," said Kaaialii. "I gave to Kaala more of my life in +loving her, and of my strength in seeking for her than ever I gave +for thee in battle. I gave to her more of love than I ever gave to my +mother, and more of my thought than I ever gave to my own life. She +was my very breath, and my life, and how shall I live without her? Her +face, since first I saw her, has been ever before me; and her warm +breasts were my joy and repose; and now that they are cold to me, I +must go where her voice and love have gone. If I shut my eyes now I see +her best; therefore let me shut my eyes forevermore." And as he spoke, +he stooped to clasp his love, said a tender word of adieu to Ua, and +then with a swift, strong blow, crushed in brow and brain with a stone. + +The dead chief lay by the side of his love, and Ua wailed over +both. Then the King ordered that the two lovers should lie side by +side on a ledge of the cave; and that they should be wrapped in tapas +which should be brought down through the sea in tight bamboos. Then +there was great wailing for the chief and the maid who lay in the cave; +and thus wailed Ua: + + + "Where art thou, O brave chief? + Where art thou, O fond girl? + Will ye sleep by the sound of the sea? + And will ye dream of the gods of the deep? + O sire, where now is thy child? + O mother, where now is thy son? + The lands of Kohala shall mourn, + And valleys of Lanai shall lament. + The spear of the chief shall rot in the cave, + And the tapa of the maid is left undone. + The wreaths for his neck, they shall fade, + They shall fade away on the hills. + O Kaaialii, who shall spear the uku? + O Kaala, who shall gather the na-u? + Have ye gone to the shores of Kahiki, + To the land of our father, Wakea? + Will ye feed on the moss of the cave, + And the limpets of the surf-beaten shore? + O chief, O friend, I would feed ye, + O chief, O friend, I would rest ye. + Ye loved, like the sun and the flower, + Ye lived like the fish and the wave, + And now like the seeds in a shell, + Ye sleep in your cave by the sea. + Alas! O chief, alas! O my friend, + Will ye sleep in the cave evermore?" + + +And thus Ua wailed, and then was borne away by her brother to the +sorrowful shore of Kaunolu, where there was loud wailing for the +chief and the maid; and many were the chants of lamentation for the +two lovers, who sleep side by side in the Spouting Cave of Kaala. + + + + +XVI + +THE TOMB OF PUUPEHE + +A LEGEND OF LANAI + +_From "The Hawaiian Gazette"_ + + +One of the interesting localities of tradition, famed in Hawaiian song +and story of ancient days, is situate at the southwestern point of +the island of Lanai, and known as the _Kupapau o Puupehe_, or Tomb of +Puupehe. At the point indicated, on the leeward coast of the island, +may be seen a huge block of red lava about eighty feet high and some +sixty feet in diameter, standing out in the sea, and detached from the +mainland some fifty fathoms, around which centres the following legend. + +Observed from the overhanging bluff that overlooks Puupehe, upon the +summit of this block or elevated islet, would be noticed a small +inclosure formed by a low stone wall. This is said to be the last +resting-place of a Hawaiian girl whose body was buried there by her +lover Makakehau, a warrior of Lanai. + +Puupehe was the daughter of Uaua, a petty chief, one of the dependents +of the king of Maui, and she was won by young Makakehau as the joint +prize of love and war. These two are described in the _Kanikau_, or +Lamentation, of Puupehe, as mutually captive, the one to the other. The +maiden was a sweet flower of Hawaiian beauty. Her glossy brown, +spotless body "shone like the clear sun rising out of Haleakala." Her +flowing, curly hair, bound by a wreath of lehua blossoms, streamed +forth as she ran "like the surf crests scudding before the wind." And +the starry eyes of the beautiful daughter of Uaua blinded the young +warrior, so that he was called Makakehau, or Misty Eyes. + +The Hawaiian brave feared that the comeliness of his dear captive +would cause her to be coveted by the chiefs of the land. His soul +yearned to keep her all to himself. He said: "Let us go to the clear +waters of Kalulu. There we will fish together for the kala and the +aku, and there I will spear the turtle. I will hide you, my beloved, +forever in the cave of Malauea. Or, we will dwell together in the +great ravine of Palawai, where we will eat the young of the uwau bird, +and we will bake them in ki leaf with the sweet pala fern root. The +ohelo berries of the mountains will refresh my love. We will drink +of the cool waters of Maunalei. I will thatch a hut in the thicket of +Kaohai for our resting-place, and we shall love on till the stars die. + +The meles tell of their love in the Pulou ravine, where they caught +the bright iiwi birds, and the scarlet apapani. Ah, what sweet joys +in the banana groves of Waiakeakua, where the lovers saw naught so +beautiful as themselves! But the "misty eyes" were soon to be made +dim by weeping, and dimmer, till the drowning brine should close +them forevermore. + +Makakehau left his love one day in the cave of Malauea while he went +to the mountain spring to fill the water-gourds with sweet water. This +cavern yawns at the base of the overhanging bluff that overtops the +rock of Puupehe. The sea surges far within, but there is an inner +space which the expert swimmer can reach, and where Puupehe had often +rested and baked the _honu>_ or sea turtle, for her absent lover. + +This was the season for the _kona_, the terrific storm that comes up +from the equator and hurls the ocean in increased volume upon the +southern shores of the Hawaiian Islands. Makakehau beheld from the +rock springs of Pulou the vanguard of a great kona,--scuds of rain +and thick mist, rushing with a howling wind, across the valley of +Palawai. He knew the storm would fill the cave with the sea and kill +his love. He flung aside his calabashes of water and ran down the +steep, then across the great valley and beyond its rim he rushed, +through the bufferings of the storm, with an agonized heart, down +the hill slope to the shore. + +The sea was up indeed. The yeasty foam of mad surging waves whitened +the shore. The thundering buffet of the charging billows chorused with +the howl of the tempest. Ah! where should Misty Eyes find his love +in this blinding storm? A rushing mountain of sea filled the mouth +of Malauea, and the pent-up air hurled back the invading torrent +with bubbling roar, blowing forth great streams of spray. This was +a war of matter, a battle of the elements to thrill with pleasure +the hearts of strong men. But with one's love in the seething gulf +of the whirlpool, what would be to him the sublime cataract? What, +to see amid the boiling foam the upturned face, and the dear, tender +body of one's own and only poor dear love, all mangled? _You_ might +agonize on the brink; but Makakehau sprang into the dreadful pool +and snatched his murdered bride from the jaws of an ocean grave. + +The next day, fishermen heard the lamentation of Makakehau, and the +women of the valley came down and wailed over Puupehe. They wrapped +her in bright new kapa. They placed upon her garlands of the fragrant +_na-u_ (gardenia). They prepared her for burial, and were about to +place her in the burial ground of Manele, but Makakehau prayed that +he might be left alone one night more with his lost love. And he was +left as he desired. + +The next day no corpse nor weeping lover were to be found, till after +some search Makakehau was seen at work piling up stones on the top of +the lone sea tower. The wondering people of Lanai looked on from the +neighboring bluff, and some sailed around the base of the columnar +rock in their canoes, still wondering, because they could see no +way for him to ascend, for every face of the rock is perpendicular +or overhanging. The old belief was, that some _akua_, _kanekoa_, or +_keawe-manhili_ (deities), came at the cry of Makakehau and helped +him with the dead girl to the top. + +When Makakehau had finished his labors of placing his lost love in +her grave and placed the last stone upon it, he stretched out his +arms and wailed for Puupehe, thus: + + + "Where are you O Puupehe? + Are you in the cave of Malauea? + Shall I bring you sweet water, + The water of the mountain? + Shall I bring the uwau, + The pala, and the ohelo? + Are you baking the honu + And the red sweet hala? + Shall I pound the kalo of Maui? + Shall we dip in the gourd together? + The bird and the fish are bitter, + And the mountain water is sour. + I shall drink it no more; + I shall drink with Aipuhi, + The great shark of Manele." + + +Ceasing his sad wail, Makakehau leaped from the rock into the boiling +surge at its base, where his body was crushed in the breakers. The +people who beheld the sad scene secured the mangled corpse and buried +it with respect in the kupapau of Manele. + + + + + +XVII + +AI KANAKA + +A LEGEND OF MOLOKAI + +_Rev. A. O. Forbes_ + + +On the leeward side of the island of Molokai, a little to the east of +Kaluaaha lies the beautiful valley of Mapulehu, at the mouth of which +is located the _heiau_, or temple, of Iliiliopae, which was erected +by direction of Ku-pa, the Moi, to look directly out upon the harbor +of Ai-Kanaka, now known as Pukoo. At the time of its construction, +centuries ago, Kupa was the _Moi_, or sovereign, of the district +embracing the _Ahupuaas_, or land divisions, of Mapulehu and Kaluaaha, +and he had his residence in this heiau which was built by him and +famed as the largest throughout the whole Hawaiian group., + +Kupa had a priest named Kamalo, who resided at Kaluaaha. This priest +had two boys, embodiments of mischief, who one day while the King +was absent on a fishing expedition, took the opportunity to visit his +house at the heiau. Finding there the _pahu kaeke_ [8] belonging to +the temple, they commenced drumming on it. + +Some evil-minded persons heard Kamalo's boys drumming on the Kaeke +and immediately went and told Kupa that the priest's children were +reviling him in the grossest manner on his own drum. This so enraged +the King that he ordered his servants to put them to death. Forthwith +they were seized and murdered; whereupon Kamalo, their father, set +about to secure revenge on the King. + +Taking with him a black pig as a present, he started forth to enlist +the sympathy and services of the celebrated seer, or wizard, Lanikaula, +living some twelve miles distant at the eastern end of Molokai. On the +way thither, at the village of Honouli, Kamalo met a man the lower +half of whose body had been bitten off by a shark, and who promised +to avenge him provided he would slay some man and bring him the lower +half of his body to replace his own. But Kamalo, putting no credence +in such an offer, pressed on to the sacred grove of Lanikaula. Upon +arrival there Lanikaula listened to his grievances but could do +nothing for him. He directed him, however, to another prophet, named +Kaneakama, at the west end of the island, forty miles distant. Poor +Kamalo picked up his pig and travelled back again, past his own +home, down the coast to Palaau. Meeting with Kaneakama the prophet +directed him to the heiau of Puukahi, at the foot of the _pali_, or +precipice, of Kalaupapa, on the windward side of the island, where +he would find the priest Kahiwakaapuu, who was a _kahu_, or steward, +of Kauhuhu, the shark god. Once more the poor man shouldered his pig, +wended his way up the long ascent of the hills of Kalae to the pali of +Kalaupapa, descending which he presented himself before Kahiwakaapuu, +and pleaded his cause. He was again directed to go still farther along +the windward side of the island till he should come to the _Ana puhi_ +(eel's cave), a singular cavern at sea level in the bold cliffs between +the valleys of Waikolu and Pelekunu, where Kauhuhu, the shark god, +dwelt, and to him he must apply. Upon this away went Kamalo and his +pig. Arriving at the cave, he found there Waka and Moo, two kahus +of the shark god. "Keep off! Keep off!" they shouted. "This place is +kapu. No man can enter here, on penalty of death." + +"Death or life," answered he, "it is all the same to me if I can +only gain my revenge for my poor boys who have been killed." He then +related his story, and his wanderings, adding that he had come to +make his appeal to Kauhuhu and cared not for his own life. + +"Well," said they to him, "Kauhuhu is away now fishing, but if he +finds you here when he returns, our lives as well as yours will pay +the forfeit. However, we will see what we can do to help you. We +must hide you hereabouts, somewhere, and when he returns trust to +circumstances to accomplish your purpose." + +But they could find no place to hide him where he would be secure from +the search of the god, except the rubbish pile where the offal and +scrapings of taro were thrown. They therefore thrust him and his pig +into the rubbish heap and covered them over with the taro peelings, +enjoining him to keep perfectly still, and watch till he should see +eight heavy breakers roll in successively from the sea. He then would +know that Kauhuhu was returning from his fishing expedition. + +Accordingly, after waiting a while, the eight heavy rollers appeared, +breaking successively against the rocks; and sure enough, as the eighth +dissolved into foam, the great shark god came ashore. Immediately +assuming human form, he began snuffing about the place, and addressing +Waka and Moo, his kahus, said to them, "There is a man here." They +strenuously denied the charge and protested against the possibility +of their allowing such a desecration of the premises. But he was +not satisfied. He insisted that there was a man somewhere about, +saying, "I smell him, and if I find him you are dead men; if not, +you escape." He examined the premises over and over again, never +suspecting the rubbish heap, and was about giving up the search when, +unfortunately, Kamalo's pig sent forth a squeal which revealed the +poor fellow's hiding-place. + +Now came the dread moment. The enraged Kauhuhu seized Kamalo with +both hands and, lifting him up with the intention of swallowing him, +according to his shark instinct, had already inserted the victim's +head and shoulders into his mouth before he could speak. + +"O Kauhuhu, before you eat me, hear my petition; then do as you like." + +"Well for you that you spoke as you did," answered Kauhuhu, setting +him down again on the ground. "Now, what have you to say? Be quick +about it." + +Kamalo then rehearsed his grievances and his travels in search for +revenge, and presented his pig to the god. + +Compassion arose in the breast of Kauhuhu, and he said, "Had you come +for any other purpose I would have eaten you, but as your cause is +a sacred one I espouse it, and will revenge it on Kupa the King. You +must, however, do all that I tell you. Return to the heiau of Puukahi, +at the foot of the pali, and take the priest Kahiwakaapuu on your +back, and carry him up the pali over to the other side of the island, +all the way to your home at Kaluaaha. Erect a sacred fence all around +your dwelling-place, and surround it with the sacred flags of white +kapa. Collect black hogs by the _lau_ (four hundred), red fish by the +lau, white fowls by the lau, and bide my coming. Wait and watch till +you see a small cloud the size of a man's hand arise, white as snow, +over the island of Lanai. That cloud will enlarge as it makes its way +across the channel against the wind until it rests on the mountain +peaks of Molokai back of Mapulehu Valley. Then a rainbow will span +the valley from side to side, whereby you will know that I am there, +and that your time of revenge has come. Go now, and remember that +you are the only man who ever ventured into the sacred precincts of +the great Kauhuhu and returned alive." + +Kamalo returned with a joyful heart and performed all that had +been commanded him. He built the sacred fence around his dwelling; +surrounded the inclosure with sacred flags of white kapa; gathered +together black hogs, red fish, and white fowls, each by the lau, as +directed, with other articles sacred to the gods, such as cocoanuts +and white kapas, and then sat himself down to watch for the promised +signs of his revenge. Day after day passed until they multiplied into +weeks, and the weeks began to run into months. + +Finally, one day, the promised sign appeared. The snow white speck of +cloud, no bigger than a man's hand, arose over the mountains of Lanai +and made its way across the stormy channel in the face of the opposing +gale, increasing as it came, until it settled in a majestic mass on +the mountains at the head of Mapulehu Valley. Then appeared a splendid +rainbow, proudly overarching the valley, its ends resting on the high +lands on either side. The wind began to blow; the rain began to pour, +and shortly a furious storm came down the doomed valley, filling its +bed from side to side with a mad rushing torrent, which, sweeping +everything before it, spread out upon the belt of lowlands at the +mouth of the valley, overwhelming Kupa and all his people in one common +ruin, and washing them all into the sea, where they were devoured by +the sharks. All were destroyed except Kamalo and his family, who were +safe within their sacred inclosure, which the flood dared not touch, +though it spread terror and ruin on every side of them. Wherefore the +harbor of Pukoo, where this terrible event occurred, was long known +as _Ai Kanaka_ (man eater), and it has passed into a proverb among +the inhabitants of that region that "when the rainbow spans Mapulehu +Valley, then look out for the _Waiakoloa_,"--a furious storm of rain +and wind which sometimes comes suddenly down that valley. + + + + +XVIII + +KALIUWAA + +SCENE OF THE DEMIGOD KAMAPUAA'S ESCAPE FROM OLOPANA + +_From "The Hawaiian Spectator"_ + + +A few miles east of Laie, on the windward side of the island of Oahu, +are situated the valley and falls of Kaliuwaa, noted as one of the +most beautiful and romantic spots of the island, and famed in tradition +as possessing more than local interest. + +The valley runs back some two miles, terminating abruptly at the +foot of the precipitous chain of mountains which runs nearly the +whole length of the windward side of Oahu, except for a narrow +gorge which affords a channel for a fine brook that descends with +considerable regularity to a level with the sea. Leaving his horse +at the termination of the valley and entering this narrow pass of not +over fifty or sixty feet in width, the traveller winds his way along, +crossing and recrossing the stream several times, till he seems to be +entering into the very mountain. The walls on each side are of solid +rock, from two hundred to three hundred, and in some places four +hundred feet high, directly overhead, leaving but a narrow strip of +sky visible. + +Following up the stream for about a quarter of a mile, one's attention +is directed by the guide to a curiosity called by the natives a _waa_ +(canoe). Turning to the right, one follows up a dry channel of what +once must have been a considerable stream, to the distance of fifty +yards from the present stream. Here one is stopped by a wall of solid +rock rising perpendicularly before one to the height of some two +hundred feet, and down which the whole stream must have descended in a +beautiful fall. This perpendicular wall is worn in by the former action +of the water in the shape of a gouge, and in the most perfect manner; +and as one looks upon it in all its grandeur, but without the presence +of the cause by which it was formed, he can scarcely divest his mind +of the impression that he is gazing upon some stupendous work of art. + +Returning to the present brook, we again pursued our way toward the +fall, but had not advanced far before we arrived at another, on the +left hand side of the brook, similar in many respects, but much larger +and higher than the one above mentioned. The forming agent cannot be +mistaken, when a careful survey is made of either of these stupendous +perpendicular troughs. The span is considerably wider at the bottom +than at the top, this result being produced by the spreading of the +sheet of water as it was precipitated from the dizzy height above. The +breadth of this one is about twenty feet at the bottom, and its depth +about fourteen feet. But its depth and span gradually diminish from +the bottom to the top, and the rock is worn as smooth as if chiselled +by the hand of an artist. Moss and small plants have sprung out from +the little soil that has accumulated in the crevices, but not enough +to conceal the rock from observation. It would be an object worth the +toil to discover what has turned the stream from its original channel. + +Leaving this singular curiosity, we pursued our way a few yards +farther, when we arrived at the fall. This is from eighty to one +hundred feet high, and the water is compressed into a very narrow +space just where it breaks forth from the rock above. It is quite +a pretty sheet of water when the stream is high. We learned from +the natives that there are two falls above this, both of which are +shut out from the view from below, by a sudden turn in the course +of the stream. The perpendicular height of each is said to be much +greater than of the one we saw. The upper one is visible from the +road on the seashore, which is more than two miles distant, and, +judging from information obtained, must be between two and three +hundred feet high. The impossibility of climbing the perpendicular +banks from below deprived us of the pleasure of farther ascending the +stream toward its source. This can be done only by commencing at the +plain and following up one of the lateral ridges. This would itself +be a laborious and fatiguing task, as the way would be obstructed by +a thick growth of trees and tangled underbrush. + +The path leading to this fall is full of interest to any one who loves +to study nature. From where we leave our horses at the head of the +valley and commence entering the mountain, every step presents new +and peculiar beauties. The most luxuriant verdure clothes the ground, +and in some places the beautifully burnished leaves of the ohia, or +native apple-tree (_Eugenia malaccensis_), almost exclude the few +rays of light that find their way down into this secluded nook. A +little farther on, and the graceful bamboo sends up its slender +stalk to a great height, mingling its dark, glossy foliage with the +silvery leaves of the kukui, or candle-nut (_Aleurites moluccana_); +these together form a striking contrast to the black walls which rise +in such sullen grandeur on each side. + +Nor is the beauty of the spot confined to the luxuriant verdure, +or the stupendous walls and beetling crags. The stream itself is +beautiful. From the basin at the falls to the lowest point at which we +observed it, every succeeding step presents a delightful change. Here, +its partially confined waters burst forth with considerable force, +and struggle on among the opposing rocks for some distance; there, +collected in a little basin, its limpid waves, pure as the drops of +dew from the womb of the morning, circle round in ceaseless eddies, +until they get within the influence of the downward current, when +away they whirl, with a gurgling, happy sound, as if joyous at being +released from their temporary confinement. Again, an aged kukui, +whose trunk is white with the moss of accumulated years, throws his +broad boughs far over the stream that nourishes his vigorous roots, +casting a meridian shadow upon the surface of the water, which is +reflected back with singular distinctness from its mirrored bosom. + +To every other gratification must be added the incomparable fragrance +of the fresh wood, in perpetual life and vigor, which presents a +freshness truly grateful to the senses. But it is in vain to think of +conveying an adequate idea of a scene where the sublime is mingled +with the beautiful, and the bold and striking with the delicate and +sensitive; where every sense is gratified, the mind calmed, and the +whole soul delighted. + +Famed as this spot is for its natural scenic attractions, intimated +in the foregoing description, its claim of distinction with Hawaiians +is indelibly fixed by the traditions of ancient times, the narration +of which, at this point, will assist the reader to understand the +character of the native mind and throw some light also on the history +of the Hawaiians. + +Tradition in this locality deals largely with Kamapuaa, the famous +demigod whose exploits figure prominently in the legends of the entire +group. Summarized, the story is about as follows: + +Kamapuaa, the fabulous being referred to, seems, according to the +tradition, to have possessed the power of transforming himself into +a hog, in which capacity he committed all manner of depredations upon +the possessions of his neighbors. He having stolen some fowls belonging +to Olopana, who was the King of Oahu, the latter, who was then living +at Kaneohe, sent some of his men to secure the thief. They succeeded +in capturing him, and having tied him fast with cords, were bearing +him in triumph to the King, when, thinking they had carried the joke +far enough, he burst the bands with which he was bound, and killed +all the men except one, whom he permitted to convey the tidings to +the King. This defeat so enraged the monarch that he determined to go +in person with all his force, and either destroy his enemy, or drive +him from his dominions. He accordingly, despising ease inglorious, + + + Waked up, with sound of conch and trumpet shell, + The well-tried warriors of his native dell, + + +at whose head he sought his waiting enemy. Success attending the King's +attack, his foe was driven from the field with great loss, and betook +himself to the gorge of Kaliuwaa, which leads to the falls. Here the +King thought he had him safe; and one would think so too, to look +at the immense precipices that rise on each side, and the falls in +front. But the sequel will show that he had a slippery fellow to deal +with, at least when he chose to assume the character of a swine; for, +being pushed to the upper end of the gorge near the falls, and seeing +no other way of escape, he suddenly transformed himself into a hog, +and, rearing upon his hind legs and leaning his back against the +perpendicular precipice, thus afforded a very comfortable ladder +upon which the remnant of the army ascended and made their escape +from the vengeance of the King. Possessing such powers, it is easy to +see how he could follow the example of his soldiers and make his own +escape. The smooth channels before described are said to have been +made by him on these occasions; for he was more than once caught in +the same predicament. Old natives still believe that they are the +prints of his back; and they account for a very natural phenomenon, +by bringing to their aid this most natural and foolish superstition. + +Many objects in the neighborhood are identified with this remarkable +personage, such as a large rock to which he was tied, a wide place +in the brook where he used to drink, and a number of trees he is +said to have planted. Many other things respecting him are current, +but as they do not relate to the matter in hand, it will perhaps +suffice to say, in conclusion, that tradition further asserts that +Kamapuaa conquered the volcano, when Pele its goddess became his wife, +and that they afterward lived together in harmony. That is the reason +why there are no more islands formed, or very extensive eruptions in +these later days, as boiling lava was the most potent weapon she used +in fighting her enemies, throwing out such quantities as greatly to +increase the size of the islands, and even to form new ones. + +Visitors to the falls, even to this day, meet with evidences of the +superstitious awe in which the locality is held by the natives. A +party who recently visited the spot state that when they reached +the falls they were instructed to make an offering to the presiding +goddess. This was done in true Hawaiian style; they built a tiny pile +of stones on one or two large leaves, and so made themselves safe +from falling stones, which otherwise would assuredly have struck them. + + + + +XIX + +BATTLE OF THE OWLS + +_Jos. M. Poepoe_ + + +The following is a fair specimen of the animal myths current in +ancient Hawaii, and illustrates the place held by the owl in Hawaiian +mythology. + +There lived a man named Kapoi, at Kahehuna, in Honolulu, who went one +day to Kewalo to get some thatching for his house. On his way back he +found some owl's eggs, which he gathered together and brought home +with him. In the evening he wrapped them in ti leaves and was about +to roast them in hot ashes, when an owl perched on the fence which +surrounded his house and called out to him, "O Kapoi, give me my eggs!" + +Kapoi asked the owl, "How many eggs had you?" + +"Seven eggs," replied the owl. + +Kapoi then said, "Well, I wish to roast these eggs for my supper." + +The owl asked the second time for its eggs, and was answered by Kapoi +in the same manner. Then said the owl, "O heartless Kapoi! why don't +you take pity on me? Give me my eggs." + +Kapoi then told the owl to come and take them. + +The owl, having got the eggs, told Kapoi to build up a _heiau_, or +temple, and instructed him to make an altar and call the temple by +the name of Manua. Kapoi built the temple as directed; set kapu days +for its dedication, and placed the customary sacrifice on the altar. + +News spread to the hearing of Kakuihewa, who was then King of Oahu, +living at the time at Waikiki, that a certain man had kapued certain +days for his heiau, and had already dedicated it. This King had made +a law that whoever among his people should erect a heiau and kapu the +same before the King had his temple kapued, that man should pay the +penalty of death. Kapoi was thereupon seized, by the King's orders, +and led to the heiau of Kupalaha, at Waikiki. + +That same day, the owl that had told Kapoi to erect a temple gathered +all the owls from Lanai, Maui, Molokai, and Hawaii to one place at +Kalapueo. [9] All those from the Koolau districts were assembled at +Kanoniakapueo, [10] and those from Kauai and Niihau at Pueohulunui, +near Moanalua. + +It was decided by the King that Kapoi should be put to death on +the day of Kane. [11] When that day came, at daybreak the owls left +their places of rendezvous and covered the whole sky over Honolulu; +and as the King's servants seized Kapoi to put him to death, the +owls flew at them, pecking them with their beaks and scratching +them with their claws. Then and there was fought the battle between +Kakuihewa's people and the owls. At last the owls conquered, and +Kapoi was released, the King acknowledging that his _Akua_ (god) +was a powerful one. From that time the owl has been recognized as +one of the many deities venerated by the Hawaiian people. + + + + +XX + +THIS LAND IS THE SEA'S + +TRADITIONAL ACCOUNT OF AN ANCIENT HAWAIIAN PROPHECY + +_Translated from Moke Manu by Thos. G. Thrum_ + + +It is stated in the history of Kaopulupulu that he was famed among +the kahunas of the island of Oahu for his power and wisdom in the +exercise of his profession, and was known throughout the land as +a leader among the priests. His place of residence was at Waimea, +between Koolauloa and Waialua, Oahu. There he married, and there was +born to him a son whom he named Kahulupue, and whom he instructed +during his youth in all priestly vocations. + +In after years when Kumahana, brother of Kahahana of Maui, became +the governing chief (_alii aimoku_) of Oahu, Kahulupue was chosen by +him as his priest. This chief did evil unto his subjects, seizing +their property and beheading and maiming many with the _leiomano_ +(shark's tooth weapon) and _pahoa_ (dagger), without provocation, so +that he became a reproach to his people. From such treatment Kahulupue +endeavored to dissuade him, assuring him that such a course would +fail to win their support and obedience, whereas the supplying of +food and fish, with covering for the body, and malos, would insure +their affectionate regard. The day of the people was near, for the +time of conflict was approaching when he would meet the enemy. But +these counsels of Kahulupue were disregarded, so he returned to his +father at Waimea. + +Not long thereafter this chief Kumahana was cast out and rejected +by the lesser chiefs and people, and under cover of night he escaped +by canoe to Molokai, where he was ignored and became lost to further +history in consequence of his wrong-doings. + +When Kahekili, King of Maui, heard of the stealthy flight of the +governing chief of Oahu, he placed the young prince Kahahana, his +foster-son, as ruler over Oahu in the place of his deposed relative, +Kumahana. This occurred about the year 1773, and Kahahana took with +him as his intimate friend and companion one Alapai. Kahahana chose +as his place of residence the shade of the kou and cocoanut trees +of Ulukou, Waikiki, where also gathered together the chiefs of the +island to discuss and consider questions of state. + +The new ruler being of fine and stalwart form and handsome appearance, +the chiefs and common people maintained that his fame in this +respect induced a celebrated chieftainess of Kauai, named Kekuapoi, +to voyage hither. Her history, it is said, showed that she alone +excelled in maiden charm and beauty; she was handsome beyond all other +chieftainesses from Hawaii to Kauai, as "the third brightness of the +sun" (_he ekolu ula o ka la_). In consequence, Kahahana took her as +his wife, she being own sister to Kekuamanoha. + +At this time the thought occurred to the King to inquire through +the chiefs of Oahu of the whereabouts of Kaopulupulu, the celebrated +priest, of whom he had heard through Kahekili, King of Maui. In reply +to this inquiry of Kahahana, the chiefs told him that his place of +residence was at Waimea, whereupon a messenger was sent to bid him +come up by order of the King. When the messenger reached Kaopulupulu +he delivered the royal order. Upon the priest hearing this word of +the King he assented thereto, with this reply to the messenger: "You +return first and tell him that on the morning after the fourteenth +night of the moon (_po o akua_), I will reach the place of the King." + +At the end of the conference the messenger returned and stood before +Kahahana and revealed the words of Kaopulupulu; and the King waited +for the time of his arrival. + +It is true, Kaopulupulu made careful preparation for his future. Toward +the time of his departure he was engaged in considering the good or +evil of his approaching journey by the casting of lots, according to +the rites of his profession. He foresaw thereby the purpose of the +King in summoning him to dwell at court. He therefore admonished his +son to attend to all the rites and duties of the priesthood as he +had been taught, and to care for his mother and relatives. + +At early dawn Kaopulupulu arose and partook of food till satisfied, +after which he prepared himself for the journey before him. After he +had given his farewell greetings to his household he seized his bundle +and, taking a cocoanut fan in his hand, set out toward Punanue, where +was a temple (_heiau_) for priests only, called Kahokuwelowelo. This +was crown land at Waialua in ancient times. Entering the temple he +prayed for success in his journey, after which he proceeded along the +plains of Lauhulu till reaching the Anahulu stream, thence by Kemoo +to Kukaniloko, the shelter of whose prominent rock the chieftainesses +of Oahu were wont to choose for their place of confinement. + +Leaving this place he came to Kalakoa, where Kekiopilo the prophet +priest lived and died, and the scene of his vision at high noon when +he prophesied of the coming of foreigners with a strange language. Here +he stopped and rested with some of the people, and ate food with them, +after which he journeyed on by way of Waipio by the ancient path of +that time till he passed Ewa and reached Kapukaki. + +The sun was well up when he reached the water of Lapakea, so +he hastened his steps in ascending Kauwalua, at Moanalua, and +paused not till he came to the mouth of the Apuakehau stream at +Waikiki. Proceeding along the sand at this place he was discerned +by the retainers of the King and greeted with the shout, "Here comes +the priest Kaopulupulu." + +When the King heard this he was exceedingly pleased (_pihoihoi loa_) +at the time, and on the priest's meeting with King Kahahana he welcomed +Kaopulupulu with loud rejoicing. + +Without delay the King set apart a house wherein to meet and discuss +with the priest those things he had in mind, and in the consideration +of questions from first to last, Kaopulupulu replied with great +wisdom in accordance with his knowledge of his profession. At this +time of their conference he sat within the doorway of the house, and +the sun was near its setting. As he turned to observe this he gazed +out into the sky and noticing the gathering short clouds (_ao poko_) +in the heavens, he exclaimed: + +"O heaven, the road is broad for the King, it is full of chiefs and +people; narrow is my path, that of the kahuna; you will not be able +to find it, O King. Even now the short clouds reveal to me the manner +of your reign; it will not be many days. Should you heed my words, +O King, you will live to gray hair. But you will be the king to slay +me and my child." + +At these words of the priest the King meditated seriously for some +time, then spoke as follows: "Why should my days be short, and why +should your death be by me, the King?" + +Kaopulupulu replied: "O King, let us look into the future. Should you +die, O King, the lands will be desolate; but for me, the kahuna, the +name will live on from one generation to another; but my death will be +before thine, and when I am up on the heaven-feared altar then my words +will gnaw thee, O King, and the rains and the sun will bear witness." + +These courageous words of Kaopulupulu, spoken in the presence of +Kahahana without fear, and regardless of the dignity and majesty of +the King, were uttered because of the certainty that the time would +come when his words would be carried into effect. The King remained +quiet without saying a word, keeping his thoughts to himself. + +After this conference the King took Kaopulupulu to be his priest, and +in course of time he became also an intimate companion, in constant +attendance upon the King, and counselled him in the care of his +subjects, old and young, in all that pertained to their welfare. The +King regarded his words, and in their circuit of the island together +they found the people contented and holding their ruler in high +esteem. But at the end of three years the King attempted some wrong to +certain of his subjects like unto that of his deposed predecessor. The +priest remonstrated with him continually, but he would not regard +his counsel; therefore, Kaopulupulu left King Kahahana and returned +to his land at Waimea and at once tattooed his knees. This was done +as a sign that the King had turned a deaf ear to his admonitions. + +When several days had passed, rumors among certain people of Waialua +reached the priest that he was to be summoned to appear before the +King in consequence of this act, which had greatly angered his august +lord. Kahahana had gone to reside at Waianae, and from there shortly +afterward he sent messengers to fetch Kaopulupulu and his son Kahulupue +from Waimea. + +In the early morning of the day of the messenger's arrival, a rainbow +stood directly in the doorway of Kaopulupulu's house, and he asked +of his god its meaning; but his prayer was broken (_ua haki ka +pule_). This boded him ill; therefore he called to his son to stand +in prayer; but the result was the same. Then he said, "This augurs of +the day of death; see! the rising up of a man in the pass of Hapuu, +putting on his kapa with its knot fastening on the left side of the +neck, which means that he is bringing a death message." + +Shortly after the priest had ended these words a man was indeed seen +approaching along the mountain pass, with his kapa as indicated; +and he came and stood before the door of their house and delivered +the order of the King for them to go to Waianae, both him and his son. + +The priest replied: "Return you first; we will follow later," and the +messenger obeyed. When he had departed Kaopulupulu recalled to his son +the words he had spoken before the advent of the messenger, and said: +"Oh, where are you, my child? Go clothe the body; put on the malo; +eat of the food till satisfied, and we will go as commanded by the +King; but this journey will result in placing us on the altar (_kau +i ka lele_). Fear not death. The name of an idler, if he be beaten +to death, is not passed on to distinction." + +At the end of these words of his father, Kahulupue wept for love of +his relatives, though his father bid him to weep not for his family, +because he, Kaopulupulu, saw the end that would befall the King, +Kahahana, and his court of chiefs and retainers. Even at this time +the voices of distress were heard among his family and their tears +flowed, but Kaopulupulu looked on unmoved by their cries. + +He then arose and, with his son, gave farewell greetings to their +household, and set forth. In journeying they passed through Waialua, +resting in the house of a kamaaina at Kawaihapai. In passing the night +at this place Kahulupue slept not, but went out to examine the fishing +canoes of that neighborhood. Finding a large one suitable for a voyage, +he returned and awoke his father, that they might flee together that +night to Kauai and dwell on the knoll of Kalalea. But Kaopulupulu +declined the idea of flight. In the morning, ascending a hill, they +turned and looked back over the sea-spray of Waialua to the swimming +halas of Kahuku beyond. Love for the place of his birth so overcame +Kaopulupulu for a time that his tears flowed for that he should see +it no more. + +Then they proceeded on their way till, passing Kaena Point, they +reached the temple of Puaakanoe. At this sacred boundary Kaopulupulu +said to his son, "Let us swim in the sea and touch along the coast +of Makua." At one of their resting-places, journeying thus, he said, +with direct truthfulness, as his words proved: "Where are you, my +son? For this drenching of the high priests by the sea, seized will +be the sacred lands (_moo-kapu_) from Waianae to Kualoa by the chief +from the east." + +As they were talking they beheld the King's men approaching along +the sand of Makua, and shortly afterward these men came before them +and seized them and tied their hands behind their backs and took +them to the place of King Kahahana at Puukea, Waianae, and put them, +father and son, in a new grass hut unfinished of its ridge thatch, +and tied them, the one to the end post (_pouhana_) and the other to +the corner post (_poumanu_) of the house. + +At the time of the imprisonment of the priest and his son in this new +house Kaopulupulu spake aloud, without fear of dire consequences, +so that the King and all his men heard him, as follows: "Here I am +with my son in this new unfinished house; so will be unfinished the +reign of the King that slays us." At this saying Kahahana, the King, +was very angry. + +Throughout that day and the night following, till the sun was high +with warmth, the King was directing his soldiers to seize Kahulupue +first and put him to death. Obeying the orders of the King, they +took Kahulupue just outside of the house and stabbed at his eyes +with laumake spears and stoned him with stones before the eyes of +his father, with merciless cruelty. These things, though done by +the soldiers, were dodged by Kahulupue, and the priest, seeing the +King had no thought of regard for his child, spoke up with priestly +authority, as follows: "Be strong of breath, my son, till the body +touch the water, for the land indeed is the sea's." + +When Kahulupue heard the voice of his father telling him to flee to +the sea, he turned toward the shore in obedience to these last words +to him, because of the attack by the soldiers of the King. As he ran, +he was struck in the back by a spear, but he persevered and leaped into +the sea at Malae and was drowned, his blood discoloring the water. His +dead body was taken and placed up in the temple at Puehuehu. After +the kapu days therefore the King, with his chiefs and soldiers, +moved to Puuloa, Ewa, bringing with them the priest Kaopulupulu, and +after some days he was brought before the King by the soldiers, and +without groans for his injuries was slain in the King's presence. But +he spoke fearlessly of the vengeance that would fall upon the King +in consequence of his death, and during their murderous attack upon +him proclaimed with his dying breath: "You, O King, that kill me here +at Puuloa, the time is near when a direct death will be yours. Above +here in this land, and the spot where my lifeless body will be borne +and placed high on the altar for my flesh to decay and slip to the +earth, shall be the burial place of chiefs and people hereafter, and +it shall be called 'the royal sand of the mistaken'; there will you +be placed in the temple." At the end of these words of Kaopulupulu +his spirit took flight, and his body was left for mockery and abuse, +as had been that of his son in the sea of Malae, at Waianae. + +After a while the body of the priest was placed on a double canoe +and brought to Waikiki and placed high in the cocoanut trees at +Kukaeunahi, the place of the temple, for several ten-day periods (_he +mau anahulu_) without decomposition and falling off of the flesh to +the sands of Waikiki. + +When King Kahekili of Maui heard of the death of the priest +Kaopulupulu by Kahahana, he sent some of his men thither by canoe, +who landed at Waimanalo, Koolau, where, as spies, they learned from +the people respecting Kaopulupulu and his death, with that of his son; +therefore they returned and told the King the truth of these reports, +at which the affection of Kahekili welled up for the dead priest, and +he condemned the King he had established. Coming with an army from +Maui, he landed at Waikiki without meeting Kahahana, and took back +the government of Oahu under his own kingship. The chiefs and people +of Oahu all joined under Kahekili, for Kahahana had been a chief of +wrong-doing. This was the first sea of Kaopulupulu in accordance with +his prophetic utterance to his son, "This land is the sea's." + +Upon the arrival here at Oahu of Kahekili, Kahahana fled, with +his wife Kekuapoi, and friend Alapai, and hid in the shrubbery +of the hills. They went to Aliomanu, Moanalua, to a place called +Kinimakalehua; then moved along to Keanapuaa and Kepookala, at the +lochs of Puuloa, and from there to upper Waipoi; thence to Wahiawa, +Helemano, and on to Lihue; thence they came to Poohilo, at Honouliuli, +where they first showed themselves to the people and submitted +themselves to their care. + +While they were living there, report thereof was made to Kahekili, +the King, who thereupon sent Kekuamanoha, elder brother of Kekuapoi, +the wife of Kahahana, with men in double canoes from Waikiki, landing +first at Kupahu, Hanapouli, Waipio, with instructions to capture +and put to death Kahahana, as also his friend Alapai, but to save +alive Kekuapoi. When the canoes touched at Hanapouli, they proceeded +thence to Waikele and Hoaeae, and from there to Poohilo, Honouliuli, +where they met in conference with Kahahana and his party. At the +close of the day Kekuamanoha sought by enticing words to induce +his brother-in-law to go up with him and see the father King and be +assured of no death condemnation, and by skilled flattery he induced +Kahahana to consent to his proposition; whereupon preparation was made +for the return. On the following morning, coming along and reaching +the plains of Hoaeae, they fell upon and slew Kahahana and Alapai +there, and bore their lifeless bodies to Halaulani, Waipio, where +they were placed in the canoes and brought up to Waikiki and placed +up in the cocoanut trees by King Kahekili and his priests from Maui, +as Kaopulupulu had been. Thus was fulfilled the famous saying of the +Oahu priest in all its truthfulness. + +According to the writings of S. M. Kamakau and David Malo, recognized +authorities, the thought of Kaopulupulu as expressed to his son +Kahulupue, "This land is the sea's," was in keeping with the famous +prophetic vision of Kekiopilo that "the foreigners possess the land," +as the people of Hawaii now realize. The weighty thought of this +narration and the application of the saying of Kaopulupulu to this +time of enlightenment are frequent with certain leaders of thought +among the people, as shown in their papers. + + + + +XXI + +KU-ULA, THE FISH GOD OF HAWAII + +_Translated from Moke Manu by M. K. Nakuina_ + + +The story of Ku-ula, considered by ancient Hawaiians as the deity +presiding over and controlling the fish of the sea,--a story still +believed by many of them to-day,--is translated and somewhat condensed +from an account prepared by a recognized legendary bard of these +islands. The name of Ku-ula is known from the ancient times on each +of the islands of the Hawaiian group, and the writer gives the Maui +version as transmitted through the old people of that island. + +Ku-ula had a human body, and was possessed with wonderful or miraculous +power (_mana kupua_) in directing, controlling, and influencing all +fish of the sea, at will. + +Leho-ula, in the land of Aleamai, Hana, Maui, is where Ku-ula and +Hina-pu-ku-ia lived. Nothing is known of their parents, but tradition +deals with Ku-ula, his wife, their son Ai-ai, and Ku-ula-uka, +a younger brother of Ku-ula. These lived together for a time at +Leho-ula, and then the brothers divided their work between them, +Ku-ula-uka choosing farm work, or work pertaining to the land, +from the seashore to the mountain-top, while Ku-ula--known also as +Ku-ula-kai--chose to be a fisherman, with such other work as pertained +to the sea, from the pebbly shore to ocean depths. After this division +Ku-ula-uka went up in the mountains to live, and met a woman known +as La-ea--called also Hina-ulu-ohia--a sister of Hina-pu-ku-ia, +Ku-ula's wife. These sisters had three brothers, named Moku-ha-lii, +Kupa-ai-kee, and Ku-pulu-pulu-i-ka-na-hele. This trio were called +by the old people the gods of the canoe-making priests--"_Na akua +aumakua o ka poe kahuna kalai waa._" + +While Ku-ula and his wife were living at Leho-ula he devoted all his +time to his chosen vocation, fishing. His first work was to construct +a fish-pond handy to his house but near to the shore where the surf +breaks, and this pond he stocked with all kinds of fish. Upon a +rocky platform he also built a house to be sacred for the fishing +kapu which he called by his own name, Ku-ula. + +It is asserted that when Ku-ula made all these preparations he believed +in the existence of a God who had supreme power over all things. That +is why he prepared this place wherein to make his offerings of the +first fish caught by him to the fish god. From this observance of +Ku-ula all the fish were tractable (_laka loa_) unto him; all he +had to do was to say the word, and the fish would appear. This was +reported all over Hana and when Kamohaolii, the King (who was then +living at Wananalua, the land on which Kauiki Hill stands) heard of +it, he appointed Ku-ula to be his head fisherman. Through this pond, +which was well stocked with all kinds of fish, the King's table was +regularly supplied with all rare varieties, whether in or out of +season. Ku-ula was his mainstay for fish-food and was consequently +held in high esteem by Kamohoalii, and they lived without disagreement +of any kind between them for many years. + +During this period the wife of Ku-ula gave birth to a son, whom they +called Aiai-a-Ku-ula (Aiai of Ku-ula), The child was properly brought +up according to the usage of those days, and when he was old enough +to care for himself an unusual event occurred. + +A large _puhi_ (eel), called Koona, lived at Wailau, on the windward +side of the island of Molokai. This eel was deified and prayed to by +the people of that place, and they never tired telling of the mighty +things their god did, one of which was that a big shark came to Wailau +and gave it battle, and during the fight the puhi caused a part of the +rocky cliff to fall upon the shark, which killed it. A cave was thus +formed, with a depth of about five fathoms; and that large opening +is there to this day, situate a little above the sea and close to +the rocky fort where lived the well known Kapeepeekauila. This puhi +then left its own place and came and lived in a cave in the sea near +Aleamai, called Kapukaulua, some distance out from the Alau rocks. It +came to break and rob the pond that Ku-ula had built and stocked with +fish of various kinds and colors, as known to-day. + +Ku-ula was much surprised on discovering his pond stock disappearing, +so he watched day and night, and at last, about daybreak, he saw a +large eel come in through the _makai_ (seaward) wall of the pond. When +he saw this he knew that it was the cause of the loss of his fish, +and was devising a way to catch and kill it; but on consulting with +his wife they decided to leave the matter to their son Aiai, for him +to use his own judgment as to the means by which the thief might be +captured and killed. When Aiai was told of it he sent word to all +the people of Aleamai and Haneoo to make ili hau ropes several lau +fathoms in length; and when all was ready a number of the people +went out with it in two canoes, one each from the two places, with +Aiai-a-Ku-ula in one of them. He put two large stones in his canoe +and held in his hands a fisherman's gourd (_hokeo_), in which was a +large fishhook called manaiaakalani. + +When the canoes had proceeded far out he located his position by +landmarks; and looking down into the sea, and finding the right place, +he told the paddlers to cease paddling. Standing up in the canoe +and taking one of the stones in his hands he dived into the sea. Its +weight took him down rapidly to the bottom, where he saw a big cave +opening right before him, with a number of fishes scurrying about +the entrance, such as uluas and other deep sea varieties. Feeling +assured thereby that the puhi was within, he arose to the surface +and got into his canoe. Resting for a moment, he then opened the +gourd and took out the hook manaiaakalani and tied the hau rope to +it. He also picked up a long stick and placed at the end of it the +hook, baited with a preparation of cocoanut and other substances +attractive to fishes. Before taking his second dive he arranged with +those on the canoe as to the signs to them of his success. Saying +this, he picked up the other stone and dived down again into the sea; +then, proceeding to the cave, he placed the hook in it, at the same +time murmuring a few incantations in the name of his parents. When +he knew that the puhi was hooked he signalled, as planned, to tell +those on the canoe of his success. In a short while he came to the +surface, and entering the canoe they all returned to shore, trailing +the rope behind. He told those in the canoe from Haneoo to paddle +thither and to Hamoa, and to tell all the people to pull the puhi; +like instructions were given those on the Aleamai canoe for their +people. The two canoes set forth on their courses to the landings, +keeping in mind Aiai's instructions, which were duly carried out by +the people of the two places; and there were many for the work. + +Then Aiai ascended Kaiwiopele Hill and motioned to the people of +both places to pull the ropes attached to the hook on the mouth of +the puhi. It was said that the Aleamai people won the victory over +the much greater number from the other places, by landing the puhi +on the pahoehoe stones at Lehoula. The people endeavored to kill the +prize, but without success till Aiai came and threw three ala stones +at it and killed it. The head was cut off and cooked in the _imu_ +(oven). The bones of its jaw, with the mouth wide open, are seen to +this day at a place near the shore, washed by the waves,--the rock +formation at a short distance having such a resemblance. + +Residents of the place state that all ala stones near where the +imu was made in which the puhi was baked do not crack when heated, +as they do elsewhere, because of the imu heating of that time. It +is so even to this day. The backbone (_iwi kuamoo_) of this puhi is +still lying on the pahoehoe where Aiai killed it with the three ala +stones,--the rocky formation, about thirty feet in length, exactly +resembling the backbone of an eel. The killing of this puhi by Aiai +gave him fame among the people of Hana. Its capture was the young lad's +first attempt to follow his father's vocation, and his knowledge was +a surprise to the people. + +After this event a man came over from Waiiau, Molokai, who was a _kahu_ +(keeper) of the puhi. He dreamed one night that he saw its spirit, +which told him that his _aumakua_ (god) had been killed at Hana, so +he came to see with his own eyes where this had occurred. Arriving at +Wananalua he was befriended by one of the retainers of Kamohoalii, +the King of Hana, and lived there a long time serving under him, +during which time he learned the story of how the puhi had been caught +and killed by Aiai, the son of Ku-ula and Hinapukuia, whereupon he +sought to accomplish their death. + +Considering a plan of action, he went one day to Ku-ula, without +orders, and told him that the King had sent him for fish for the +King. Ku-ula gave him but one fish, an ulua, with a warning direction, +saying, "Go back to the King and tell him to cut off the head of +the fish and cook it in the imu, and the flesh of its body cut up +and salt and dry in the sun, for 'this is Hana the _aupehu_ land; +Hana of the scarce fish; the fish Kama; the fish of Lanakila.' (_Eia +o Hana la he aina aupehu; o Hana keia i ka ia iki; ka ia o Kama; +ka ia o Lanakila_)." + +When the man returned to the King and gave him the fish, the King +asked: "Who gave it to you?" and the man answered: + +"Ku-ula." + +Then it came into his head that this was his chance for revenge, so +he told the King what Ku-ula had said but not in the same way, saying: +"Your head fisherman told me to come back and tell you that your head +should be cut from your body and cooked in the imu, and the flesh of +your body should be cut up and salted and dried in the sun." + +The King on hearing this message was so angered with Ku-ula, his head +fisherman, that he told the man to go and tell all his _konohikis_ +(head men of lands with others under them) and people, to go up in the +mountains and gather immediately plenty of firewood and place it around +Ku-ula's house, for he and his wife and child should be burned up. + +This order of the King was carried out by the konohikis and people +of all his lands except those of Aleamai. These latter did not obey +this order of the King, for Ku-ula had always lived peaceably among +them. There were days when they had no fish, and he had supplied +them freely. + +When Ku-ula and his wife saw the people of Hana bringing firewood +and placing it around the house they knew it foreboded trouble; so +Ku-ula went to a place where taro, potatoes, bananas, cane, and some +gourds were growing. Seeing three dry gourds on the vine, he asked the +owner for them and was told to take them. These he took to his house +and discussed with his wife the evil day to come, and told Aiai that +their house would be burned and their bodies too, but not to fear death +nor trouble himself about it when the people came to shut them in. + +After some thinking Ku-ula remembered his giving the ulua to the King's +retainer and felt that he was the party to blame for this action of +the King's people. He had suspected it before, but now felt sure; +therefore he turned to his son and said: "Our child, Aiai-a-Ku-ula, +if our house is burned, and our bodies too, you must look sharp for +the smoke when it goes straight up to the hill of Kaiwiopele. That +will be your way out of this trouble, and you must follow it till +you find a cave where you will live. You must take this hook called +manaiaakalani with you; also this fish-pearl (_pa hi aku_), called +_Kahuoi_; this shell called _lehoula_, and this small sandstone from +which I got the name they call me, _Ku-ula-au-a-Ku-ulakai_. It is +the progenitor of all the fish in the sea. You will be the one to +make all the ku-ulas from this time forth, and have charge also of +making all the fishing stations (_ko'a lawaia_) in the sea throughout +the islands. Your name shall be perpetuated and those of your parents +also, through all generations to come, and I hereby confer upon you +all my power and knowledge. Whenever you desire anything call, or ask, +in our names, and we will grant it. We will stand up and go forth +from here into the sea and abide there forever; and you, our child, +shall live on the land here without worrying about anything that may +happen to you. You will have power to punish with death all those who +have helped to burn us and our house. Whether it be king or people, +they must die; therefore let us calmly await the calamity that is to +befall us." + +All these instructions Aiai consented to carry out from first to last, +as a dutiful son. + +After Ku-ula's instructions to his son, consequent upon the +manifestations of coming trouble, the King's people came one day and +caught them and tied their hands behind their backs, the evil-doer +from Molokai being there to aid in executing the cruel orders of +Kamohoalii resulting from his deceitful story. Upon being taken +into their house Ku-ula was tied to the end post of the ridge pole +(_pouhana)_, the wife was tied to the middle post (_kai waena_) of the +house, and the boy, Aiai, was tied to one of the corner posts (_pou +o manu_). Upon fastening them in this manner the people went out of +the house and barricaded the doorway with wood, which they then set on +fire. Before the fire was lit, the ropes with which the victims were +tied dropped off from their hands. Men, women, and children looked +on at the burning house with deep pity for those within, and tears +were streaming down their cheeks as they remembered the kindness of +Ku-ula during all the time they had lived together. They knew not +why this family and their house should be burned in this manner. + +When the fire was raging all about the house and the flames were +consuming everything, Ku-ula and his wife gave their last message to +their son and left him. They went right out of the house as quietly +as the last breath leaves the body, and none of the people standing +there gazing saw where, or how, Ku-ula and his wife came forth out of +the house. Aiai was the only one that retained material form. Their +bodies were changed by some miraculous power and entered the sea, +taking with them all the fish swimming in and around Hana. They +also took all sea-mosses, crabs, crawfish, and the various kinds of +shellfish along the seashore, even to the opihi-koele at the rocky +beach; every edible thing in the sea was taken away. This was the +first stroke of Ku-ula's revenge on the King and the people of Hana who +obeyed his mandate; they suffered greatly from the scarcity of fish. + +When Ku-ula and his wife were out of the house the three gourds +exploded from the heat, one by one, and all those who were gazing at +the burning house believed the detonations indicated the bursting +of the bodies of Ku-ula, his wife, and child. The flames shot up +through the top of the house, and the black smoke hovered above it, +then turned toward the front of Kaiwiopele Hill. The people saw Aiai +ascend through the flames and walk upon the smoke toward the hill +till he came to a small cave that opened to receive and rescue him. + +As Aiai left the house it burned fiercely, and, carrying out the +instructions of his father he called upon him to destroy by fire +all those who had caught and tied them in their burning house. As he +finished his appeal he saw the rippling of the wind on the sea and +a misty rain coming with it, increasing as it came till it reached +Lehoula, which so increased the blazing of the fire that the flames +reached out into the crowd of people for those who had obeyed the +King. The man from Molokai, who was the cause of the trouble, was +reached also and consumed by the fire, and the charred bodies were left +to show to the people the second stroke of Ku-ula's vengeance. Strange +to say, all those who had nothing to do with this cruel act, though +closer to the burning house, were uninjured; the tongues of fire +reached out only for the guilty ones. In a little while but a few +smouldering logs and ashes were all that remained of the house of +Ku-ula. Owing to this strange action of the fire some of the people +doubted the death of Ku-ula and his wife, and much disputation arose +among them on the subject. + +When Aiai walked out through the flames and smoke and reached the +cave, he stayed there through that night till the next morning, then, +leaving his hook, pearl shell, and stone there, he went forth till +he came to the road at Puilio, where he met several children amusing +themselves by shooting arrows, one of whom made friends with him and +asked him to his house. Aiai accepted the invitation, and the boy +and his parents treating him well, he remained with them for some days. + +While Aiai was living in their house the parents of the boy heard +of the King's order for all the people of Hana to go fishing for +hinalea. The people obeyed the royal order, but when they went down to +the shore with their fishing baskets they looked around for the usual +bait (_ueue_), which was to be pounded up and put into the baskets, +but they could not find any, nor any other material to be so used, +neither could they see any fish swimming around in the sea. "Why?" was +the question. Because Ku-ula and his wife had taken with them all +the fish and everything pertaining to fishing. Finding no bait they +pounded up limestone and placed it in the baskets and swam out and +set them in the sea. They watched and waited all day, but in vain, +for not a single hinalea was seen, nor did any enter the baskets. When +night came they went back empty-handed and came down again the next day +only to meet the same luck. The parents of the boy who had befriended +Aiai were in this fishing party, in obedience to the King's orders, +but they got nothing for their trouble. Aiai, seeing them go down +daily to Haneoo, asked concerning it, and was told everything; so he +bade his friend come with him to the cave where he had stayed after +his father's house was burned. Arriving there he showed the stone +fish god, Pohaku-muone, and said: "We can get fish up here from this +stone without much work or trouble." + +Then Aiai picked up the stone and they went down to Lehoula, and +setting it down at a point facing the pond which his father had made +he repeated these words: "O Ku-ula, my father; O Hina, my mother, +I place this stone here in your name, Ku-ula, which action will make +your name famous and mine too, your son; the keeping of this ku-ula +stone I give to my friend, and he and his offspring hereafter will +do and act in all things pertaining to it in our names." + +After saying these words he told his friend his duties and all things +to be observed relative to the stone and the benefits to be derived +therefrom as an influencing power over such variety of fish as he +desired. This was the first establishment of the _ko'a ku-ula_ on +land,--a place where the fisherman was obliged to make his offering +of the first of his catch by taking two fishes and placing them on +the ku-ula stone as an offering to Ku-ula. Thus Aiai first put in +practice the fishing oblations established by his father at the place +of his birth, in his youth, but it was accomplished only through the +mana kupua of his parents. + +When Aiai had finished calling on his parents and instructing his +friend, there were seen several persons walking along the Haneoo beach +with their fishing baskets and setting them in the sea, but catching +nothing. At Aiai's suggestion he and his friend went over to witness +this fishing effort. When they reached the fishers Aiai asked them, +"What are those things placed there for?" + +They answered, "Those are baskets for catching hinaleas, a fish that +our King, Kamohoalii, longs for, but we cannot get bait to catch the +fish with." + +"Why is it so?" asked Aiai. + +And they answered, "Because Ku-ula and his family are dead, and all +the fish along the beach of Hana are taken away." + +Then Aiai asked them for two baskets. Having received them, he bade +his friend take them and follow him. They went to a little pool near +the beach, and setting the baskets therein, he called on his parents +for hinaleas. As soon as he had finished, the fish were seen coming in +such numbers as to fill the pool, and still they came. Aiai now told +his friend to go and fetch his parents and relatives to get fish, +and to bring baskets with which to take home a supply; they should +have the first pick, and the owners of the baskets should have the +next chance. The messenger went with haste and brought his relatives +as directed. Aiai then took two fishes and gave them to his friend to +place on the ko'a they had established at Lehoula for the ku-ula. He +also told him that before the setting of the sun of that day they would +hear that King Kamohoalii of Hana was dead, choked and strangled to +death by the fish. These prophetic words of Aiai came true. + +After Aiai had made his offering, his friend's parents came to where +the fish were gathering and were told to take all they desired, +which they did, returning home happy for the liberal supply obtained +without trouble. The owners of the baskets were then called and told +to take all the fish they wished for themselves and for the King. When +these people saw the great supply they were glad and much surprised +at the success of these two boys. The news of the reappearing of the +fish spread through the district, and the people flocked in great +numbers and gathered hinaleas to their satisfaction, and returned to +their homes with rejoicing. Some of those who gave Aiai the baskets +returned with their bundles of fish to the King. When he saw so many +of those he had longed for he became so excited that he reached out +and picked one up and put it in his mouth, intending to eat it; but +instead the fish slipped right into his throat and stuck there. Many +tried to reach and take it out, but were unable, and before the sun +set that day Kamohoalii, the King of Hana, died, being choked and +strangled to death by the fish. Thus the words of Aiai, the son of +Ku-ula, proved true. + +By the death of the King of Hana the revenge was complete. The +evil-doer from Molokai, and those who obeyed the King's orders on +the day Ku-ula's house was fired, met retribution, and Aiai thus won +a victory over all his father's enemies. + +After living for a time at Hana Aiai left that place and went among +the different islands of the group establishing fishing ko'as (_ko'a +aina aumakua_). He was the first to measure the depth of the sea to +locate these fishing ko'as for the deep sea fishermen who go out in +their canoes, and the names of many of these ko'as located around +the different islands are well known. + + + + +XXII + +AIAI, SON OF KU-ULA + +PART II OF THE LEGEND OF KU-ULA, THE FISH GOD OF HAWAII + +_Translated from Moke Manu by M. K. Nakuina_ + + +After the death of the King of Hana, Aiai left the people of Haneoo +catching hinalea and went to Kumaka, a place where fresh water springs +out from the sand and rocks near the surf of Puhele, at Hamoa, where +lay a large, long stone in the sea. This stone he raised upright and +also placed others about the water spring, and said to his friend: +"To-day I name this stone Ku-a-lanakila, for I have triumphed over my +enemies; and I hereby declare that all fishes, crabs, and sea-moss +shall return again in plenty throughout the seas of Hana, as in the +days when my parents were living in the flesh at Lehoula." + +From the time Aiai raised this stone, up to the present generation, +the story of Ku-ula and Aiai is well preserved, and people have +flocked to the place where the stone stands to see it and verify the +tradition. Some kahunas advise their suffering patients to pay a visit +to the stone, Ku-lanakila, with some offerings for relief from their +sickness and also to bathe in the spring of Kumaka and the surf of +Puhele. This was a favorite spot of the kings and chiefs of the olden +times for bathing and surf-riding, and is often referred to in the +stories and legends of Hawaii-nei. This was the first stone raised by +Aiai and established as a ku-ula at Hamoa; and the old people of Hana +attributed to its influence the return of the fish to their waters. + +After Aiai's practice of his father's instructions and the return of +the fishes, his fame spread throughout the district, and the people +made much of him during his stay with them. + +A great service wrought by Aiai during his boyhood was the teaching +of his friend and his friend's parents how to make the various nets +for all kinds of fishing. He also taught them to make the different +kinds of fishing lines. When they were skilled in all these branches +of knowledge pertaining to fishing, he called the people together, +and in their presence declared his friend to be the head fisherman +of Hana, with full control of all the stations (_ko'a ia_) he had +established. This wonder-working power second to none, possessed by +Aiai, he now conferred on his friend, whereby his own name would be +perpetuated and his fame established all over the land. + +The first _ko'a ia_ (fishing ground, or station) where Aiai measured +the depth of the sea is near Aleamai, his birthplace, and is called +Kapukaulua, where he hooked and killed the eel Koona. It is a few miles +from the shore to the southeast of the rocky islet called Alau. The +second station he established was at a spot about a mile from Haneoo +and Hamoa which was for the kala, palani, nanue, puhi, and ula. These +varieties of fish are not caught by nets, or with the hook, but in +baskets which are filled with bait and let down in the deep sea. + +The third station, which he named Koauli, was located out in the deep +sea for the deep sea fishes, the depth ranging about two hundred +fathoms. This is the ko'a that fishermen have to locate by certain +shore bearings, lest a mistake be made as to the exact spot and the +bottom be found rocky and the hooks entangle in the coral. In all the +stations Aiai located there are no coral ledges where the fisherman's +hook would catch, or the line be entangled; and old Hawaiians commended +the skill of such locations, believing that the success of Aiai's +work was due to his father's influence as an ocean deity. + +At one time Aiai went over to the bay of Wananalua, the present +port of Hana, with its noted hill of Kauiki and the sandy beach +of Pueokahi. Here he made and placed a ku-ula, and also placed +a fish stone in the cliff of Kauiki whereon is the ko'a known as +Makakiloia. And the people of Hana give credit to this stone for +the frequent appearance of the akule, oio, moi, and other fishes in +their waters. + +Aiai's good work did not stop at this point; proceeding to Honomaele +he picked up three pebbles at the shore and, going into the sea, +out beyond the breaking surf, he placed them there. In due time these +three pebbles gathered others together and made a regular ridge; and +when this was accomplished, the aweoweo gathered from the far ocean +to this ridge of pebbles for rest; whereupon the people came with net, +hook, and line, and caught them as they desired. The writer witnessed +this in 1845 with his own eyes. This ko'a for aweoweo is still there, +but difficult to locate, from the fact that all the old residents +are gone--either dead or moved away. + +He next went over to Waiohue, Koolau, where he placed a stone on +a sharp rocky islet, called Paka, whereon a few puhala grow. It is +claimed that during the season of the kala, they come in from the +ocean, attracted to this locality by the power of this stone. They +continue on to Mokumana, a cape between Keanae and Wailuanui. They +come in gradually for two days, and on the third day of their reaching +the coast, at the pali of Ohea, is the time and place to surround +them with nets. In olden times while the fishermen were hauling +in their nets full of kala into the canoes, the akule and oio also +came in numbers at the same time, making it impossible to catch all +in one day; and as there were so many gathered in the net it took +them a day and a night before they could care for their draught, +which yielded so many more than could be made use of that they were +fed to the pigs and dogs. The kala of Ohea is noted for its fatness +and fine flavor. Few people are now living there, and the people who +knew all about this are dead; but the stone that Aiai placed on that +little island at Waiohue is still there. + +Aiai stayed there a few days and then returned to Hana and lived at +his birthplace quite a length of time till he was a man grown. During +this period he was teaching his art of fishing in all its forms; +and when he was satisfied the people were proficient, he prepared to +visit other places for like service. But before leaving, Aiai told +his friend to go and kill the big _hee kupua_ (wonderful octopus) +in the deep sea, right out of Wailuanui, Koolau, and he consented. + +When the canoes were made ready and drawn to the beach and the people +came prepared to start, Aiai brought the _hokeo_ (fishing gourd), +where the _leho_ (kauri shell) that Ku-ula his father gave him was +kept, and gave it to his friend. This shell is called _lehoula,_ +and the locality at Hana of that name was called after it. + +Then the canoes and people sailed away till they got out along the +palis near Kopiliula, where they rested. Aiai was not with the party, +but overlooked their operations from the pali of Puhiai. While they +rested, preparation for the lowering of the leho was being made, +and when ready, Aiai's friend called on Ku-ula and Hina for the +assistance of their wonderful powers. When he was through, he took +off the covering of the gourd and took out the leho, which had rich +beautiful colors like the rainbow, and attaching it to the line, he +lowered it into the sea, where it sent out rays of a fiery light. The +hee was so attracted by its radiance that it came out of its hole and +with its great arms, which were as long and large as a full-grown +cocoanut tree, came up to the surface of the water and stood there +like a cocoanut grove. The men were frightened, for it approached and +went right into the canoes with the intention of destroying them and +the men and capturing the leho; but it failed, because Aiai's friend, +with his skill and power, had provided himself with a stone, which, +at the proper time, he shoved into the head of the squid; and the +weight of the stone drew it down to the bottom of the sea and kept +it there, and being powerless to remove the stone, it died. The men +seized and cut off one of the arms, which was so big that it loaded +the canoes down so that they returned to Hana. When the squid died, it +turned to stone. It is pointed out to-day just outside of Wailuanui, +where a stone formation resembles the body of a squid and the arms, +with one missing. + +When Aiai saw from the pali that his friend was successful in killing +the hee, he returned to Hana unseen, and in a short while the canoes +arrived with its arm, which was divided among the people according +to the directions of Aiai. + +When Aiai saw that his friend and others of Hana were skilled in +all the art of fishing, he decided to leave his birthplace and +journey elsewhere. So he called a council of his friends and told +them of his intended departure, to establish other fishing stations +and instruct the people with all the knowledge thereof in conformity +with the injunction of Ku-ula his father. They approved of the course +contemplated and expressed their indebtedness to him for all the +benefits he had shown them. + +On leaving Aleamai he took with him the fish-hook, _manaiaakalani_, +and the fish pearl, _Kahuoi_, for aku from the little cave where +he had lodged on the hill of Kaiwiopele, and then disappeared in the +mysterious manner of his parents. He established ku-ulas and ko'a aina, +by placing three fish stones at various points as far as Kipahulu. At +the streams of Kikoo and Maulili there stands a stone to-day, which +was thrown by Aiai and dropped at a bend in the waters, unmoved by +the many freshets that have swept the valleys since that time. + +Out in the sea of Maulili is a famous station known as Koanui. It +is about a mile from the shore and marks the boundary of the sea of +Maulili, and the fish that appear periodically and are caught within +its limits have been subject to a division between the fishermen and +the landowner ever since. This is a station where the fisherman's +hook shall not return without a fish except the hook be lost, or the +line cut. + +The first time that Aiai tested this station and caught a fish with +his noted hook, he saw a fisherman in his canoe drifting idly, without +success. When he saw Aiai, this fisherman, called Kanemakua, paddled +till he came close to where Aiai was floating on an improvised canoe, +a wiliwili log, without an outrigger,--which much surprised him. Before +the fisherman reached him, Aiai felt a tug at his line and knew that +he had caught a fish and began pulling it in. When Kanemakua came +within speaking distance Aiai greeted him and gave him the fish, +putting it into his canoe. Kanemakua was made happy and thanked Aiai +for his generosity. While putting it in the canoe Aiai said: + +"This is the first time I have fished in these waters to locate (or +found) this station, and as you are the first man I meet I give you +the first fish caught. I also give you charge of this ko'a; but take my +advice. When you come here to fish and see a man meeting you in a canoe +and floating alongside of you, if at that time you have caught a fish, +then give it to him as I have done to you, without regret, and thus +get a good name and be known as a generous man. If you observe this, +great benefits will come to you and those related to you." + +As Aiai finished speaking he suddenly disappeared, and Kanemakua could +hardly realize that he had not been dreaming but for the assurance he +had in the great fish lying in his canoe. He returned to the shore with +his prize, which was so large and heavy that it required the help of +two others to carry it to the house, where it was cut up and the oven +made hot for its baking. When it was cooked he took the eyes of the +fish and offered them up as a thanksgiving sacrifice. Then the family, +friends, and neighbors around came to the feast and ate freely. During +all this time Kanemakua was thinking of the words spoken by the young +man, which he duly observed. The first ku-ula established in Maulili, +Maui, was named after him, and from that time its fish have been +given out freely without restriction or division. + +After establishing the different ku-ula stations along the coast from +Hana to Kipahulu, Aiai went to Kaupo and other places. A noted station +and ku-ula is at Kahikinui. All the stations of this place are in the +deep sea, where they use nets of three kinds; there is also fishing +with poles, and ulua fishing, because this part of the island faces +the wind; but the ku-ulas are located on the seashore, as is also +the one at Honuaula, where it is covered over by the lava flow. + +Thus was performed the good work of Aiai in establishing ku-ula +stations and fish stones continued all around the island of Maui. It +is also said that he visited Kahoolawe and established a ku-ula at +Hakioawa, though it differs from the others, being built on a high +bluff overlooking the sea, somewhat like a temple, by placing stones +in the form of a square, in the middle of which was left a space +wherein the fishermen of that island laid their first fish caught, +as a thank offering. Awa and kapa were also placed there as offerings +to the fish deities. + +An idea prevails with some people that the ko'a of Kamohoalii, the +king shark of Kahoolawe, is on this island, but if all the stories +told of it be examined there will be found no reference to a ko'a of +his on this island. + +From Kahoolawe, Aiai next went to Lanai, where he started fishing +for _aku_ (bonito) at Cape Kaunolu, using his pearl Kahuoi. This is +the first case known of fishing for aku with pearl from the land, +as it is a well known fact that this fish is caught only in deep sea, +far from shore. In the story of Kaneapua it is shown that he is the +only one who had fished for aku at the Cape of Kaunolu, where it was +started by Aiai. + +From Kaunolu, Aiai went to Kaena Cape, where at a place close to +Paomai, was a little sandy beach now known as Polihua. Here he +took a stone and carved a figure on it, then carried and placed +it on the sandy beach, and called on his parents. While making his +incantations the stone moved toward the sea and disappeared under +the water. His incantations finished, the stone reappeared and +moved toward him till it reached the place where it had been laid; +whereupon it was transformed into a turtle, and gave the name of +Polihua to that beach. This work of Aiai on the island of Lanai was +the first introduction of the turtle in the seas of Hawaii, and also +originated the habit of the turtle of going up the beach to lay its +eggs, then returning to the sea. + +After making the circuit of Lanai he went over to Molokai, landing at +Punakou and travelled along the shore till he reached Kaunakakau. At +this place he saw spawns of mullet, called Puai-i, right near the +shore, which he kicked with his foot, landing them on the sand. This +practice of kicking fish with the feet is carried on to this time, +but only at that locality. Aiai continued on along the Kona side +of Molokai, examining its fishing grounds and establishing ku-ulas +till he got to Halawa. At the Koolau side of the island he stopped at +Wailau and saw the cave of the eel Koona that went to Hana and stole +the fish from his father's pond, and the cause of all the trouble +that befell his parents and himself. + +When Aiai landed at Wailau he saw that both sides of the valley +were covered with men, women, and children engaged in closing up the +stream and diverting its water to another course, whereby they would +be enabled to catch oopu and opae. The water being low, the gourds +of some of the people were full from their catch. + +Aiai noticed their wanton method of fishing, whereby all oopus +and opaes were caught without thought of any reservation for their +propagation; therefore he called on his parents to take them all +away. The prayer was granted, for suddenly they all disappeared; +those in the water went up the stream to a place called Koki, while +those in the gourds were turned to lizards which scampered out and +ran all over the rocks. The people were much surprised at this change +and felt sorely disappointed at the loss of their food supply. + +On account of his regard for a certain lad of that place, named Kahiwa, +he showed him the place of the opaes to be up the precipitous cliff, +Koki. The youth was attentive to the direction of Aiai and going there +he found the oopus and opaes as stated, as they are to this day. That +is what established the noted saying of the old people of that land: +"Kokio of Wailau is the ladder of the opae." It is also known as the +"Pali of Kahiwa." + +When Aiai left Wailau he showed this lad the ku-ula and the fish +station in the sea he had located there, at the same distance as that +rocky island known as Mokapu. He went also to Pelekunu, Waikolu and +Kalawao, even to Kalaupapa, the present home of the lepers. At the +latter place he left a certain fish stone. That is the reason fish +constantly gather there even to this day. He also went to Hoolehua and +so on as far as _Ka lae o ka ilio_ (the dog's forehead) and _Ka lae o +ka laau_. Between these two capes in the sea is a station established +by Aiai, where a tree grew out from under a rock, Ekaha by name. It +is a hardwood tree, but the trunk and also the branches are without +leaves. This place is a great haunt for fishermen with their hooks. + +Aiai then came to Oahu, first landing at Makapuu, in Koolau, where +he founded a _pohaku-ia_ (fish stone) for red fish and for speckled +fish, and called it Malei. This was a female rock, and the fish of +that place is the uhu. It is referred to in the mele of Hiiaka, thus: + + + "I will not go to the stormy capes of Koolau, + The sea-cliffs of Moeaau. + The woman watching uhu of Makapuu + Dwells on the ledge of Kamakani + At Koolau. The living + Offers grass-twined sacrifices, O Malie!" + + +From the time Aiai founded that spawning-place until the present, +its fish have been the uhu, extending to Hanauma. There were also +several gathering-places for fish established outside of Kawaihoa. Aiai +next moved to Maunalua, then to Waialae and Kahalaia. At Kaalawai he +placed a white and brown rock. There in that place is a hole filled +with aholehole, therefore the name of the land is Kaluahole. Right +outside of Kahuahui there is a station where Aiai placed a large +round sandstone that is surrounded by spawning-places for fish; +Ponahakeone is its name. + +In ancient times the chiefs selected a very secret place wherein to +hide the dead bodies of their greatly beloved, lest some one should +steal their bones to make fish-hooks, or arrows to shoot mice with. For +that reason the ancients referred to Ponahakeone as "_He Lualoa no +Na'lii_"--a deep pit for the chiefs. + +Aiai came to Kalia and so on to Kakaako. Here he was befriended by +a man named Apua, with whom he remained several days, observing and +listening to the murmurs of the chief named Kou. This chief was a +skilful hiaku fisherman, his grounds being outside of Mamala until +you came to Moanalua. There was none so skilled as he, and generous +withal, giving akus to the people throughout the district. + +As Aiai was dwelling with his friend Apua at Kakaako, he meandered +off one day along the shore of Kulolia, and so on to Pakaka and +Kapapoko. But he did not return to the house of his friend, for +he met a young woman gathering _limu_ (sea-moss) and fishing for +crabs. This young woman, whose name was Puiwa, lived at Hanakaialama +and was a virgin, never having had a husband. She herself, as the +people would say, was forward to ask Aiai to be her husband; but he +listened to her voice, and they went up together to her home and +saw the parents and relatives, and forthwith were married. After +living with this young woman some time a son was born to them, +whom Aiai named Puniaiki. During those days was the distribution +of aku which were sent up from Honolulu to the different dwellings; +but while others were given a whole fish, they got but a portion from +some neighbor. For this reason the woman was angry, and told Aiai to +go to the brook and get some oopus fit to eat, as well as opae. Aiai +listened to the voice of his wife. He dug a ditch and constructed a +dam so as to lead the water of the brook into some pits, and thus be +able to catch the oopu and opae. He labored some days at this work, +and the fish and shrimps were hung up to dry. + +On a certain day following, Aiai and his wife went with their child +to the brook. She left her son upon the bank of the stream while she +engaged herself in catching opae and oopu from the pits. But it was +not long before the child began to cry; and as he cried, Aiai told +his wife to leave her fishing, but she talked saucily to him. So Aiai +called upon the names of his ancestors. Immediately a dark and lowering +cloud drew near and poured out a flood of water upon the stream, and +in a short time the dam was broken by the freshet and all the oopu +and opae, together with the child, were swept toward the sea. But +the woman was not taken by the flood. Aiai then rose up and departed, +without thought of his wife. + +He went down from the valley to Kaumakapili, and as he was standing +there he saw some women fishing for oopu on the banks of the stream, +the daughter of the chief Kikihale being with them. At that time, +behold, there was caught by the female guardian of the daughter of +Kikihale a very large oopu. This oopu she showed to her _protegee_, +who told her to put it into a large calabash with water and feed it +with limu, so that it might become a pet fish. This was done and the +oopu was tended very carefully night and day. + +Aiai stood by and saw the fish lifted out of the brook, and recognized +it at the same time as his own child, changed from a human being into +an oopu. + +(At this point the story of Aiai gives place to that of his child.) + +When the oopu was placed in a large calabash with water, it was +carefully tended and fed with sea-moss for some time, but one day +in seeing to this duty the guardian of the chieftainess, on reaching +the calabash, was startled to behold therein a human child, looking +with its eyes. And the water in the calabash had disappeared. She was +greatly surprised and seized with a dark foreboding, and a trembling +fear possessed her as she looked upon this miraculous child. + +This woman went and told the chieftainess of this child they knew to +have had the form of an oopu, and as Kikihale heard the story of her +guardian she went quickly, with grave doubts, however, of this her +report; but there, on reaching the calabash, as she looked she saw +indeed a child therein. She immediately put forth her hands toward +the child and lifting it, carefully examined its form and noted +its agreeable features. As the thought quickly possessed this girl, +she said: "Now, my guardian, you and your husband take and rear this +child till he is grown, then I will be his wife." + +The guardian answered her: "When this child becomes grown you will +be old; that is, your days will be in the evening of life, while his +place will be in the early morn. Will you not thereby have lasting +cause for dissatisfaction and contention between you in the future?" + +Kikihale answering her guardian said: "You are not to blame; these +things are mine to consider, for the reason that the desire is mine, +not yours, my guardian." + +After this talking the child was quickly known of among the chiefs +and attendants. He was nourished and brought up to adult age, when +Kikihale took him for her husband as she had said; and for a time +they dwelt together as man and wife without disagreement between +them. But during these days Kikihale saw plainly that her husband was +not disposed to do anything for their support; therefore she mourned +over it continually and angrily reproved him, finally, saying: + +"O my husband, can you not go forth also, as others, to assist +our father and the attendants in the duties of fishing, instead of +eating till you are satisfied, then rolling over with face upward +to the ridge-pole of the house and counting the ahos? It may do +while my father is alive; but if he should die, whence would come +our support?" Thus she spoke reproachingly from day to day, and the +words stung Puniaiki's heart with much pain. + +And this is what he said to his wife one day: "It is unpleasant to +hear you constantly talking thus. Not as wild animals is the catching +of fish in the sea; they are obedient if called, and you may eat +wastefully of my fish when procured. I have authority over fish, +men, pigs, and dogs. If you are a favorite of your father then go to +him for double canoes, with their fishing appurtenances, and men to +paddle them." + +When Kikihale heard these words of her husband she hastened to Kou, +her father, and told him all that Puniaiki had said, and the request +was promptly executed. Kikihale returned to her husband and told him +all she had done. + +On Puniaiki's going down to the canoe place he found the men were +making ready the canoes with the nets, rods, lines, and the pearl +fish-hooks. Here he lit a fire and burned up the pearl fish-hooks, +at which his wife was much angered and cried loudly for the hiaku +pearl hooks of her father. She went and told Kou of this mischievous +action of her husband, but he answered her not a word at this act of +his son-in-law, though he had supplied five gourds filled with them, +a thousand in number, and the strangest thing was, that all were +burned up save two only which Kou had reserved. + +That night Puniaiki slept apart from his wife, and he told the canoe +paddlers to sleep in the canoe sheds, not to go to their homes that +night; and they obeyed his voice. + +It was Kou's habit to rouse his men before break of day to sail in +the malaus for aku fishing at the mouth of the harbor, for that was +their feeding-time, not after the sun had risen. Thus would the canoes +enter the schools of aku and this chief became famous thereby as a +most successful fisherman. But on this day was seen the sorcerer's +work of this child of Aiai. + +As Kou with his men set out always before dawn, here was this Puniaiki +above at his place at sunrise. At this time on his awaking from sleep +he turned his face mountainward, and looking at Kaumakapili he saw +a rainbow and its reddish mist spread out at that place, wherein was +standing a human form. He felt conscious that it was Aiai his father, +therefore he went there and Aiai showed him the place of the _pa_ +(fish-hook) called Kahuai, and he said to his son: "Here will I stay +till you return; be quick." + +Upon Puniaiki reaching the landing the canoes were quickly made +ready to depart, and as they reached Kapapoko and Pakaka, at the sea +of Kuloloia, they went on to Ulukua, now the lighthouse location of +Honolulu harbor. At this place Puniaiki asked the paddlers: "What is +the name of that surf cresting beneath the prow of our canoes?" + +"Puuiki," replied the men. + +He then said to them: "Point straight the prow of the canoes and paddle +with strength." At these words of Puniaiki their minds were in doubt, +because there were probably no akus at that place in the surf; but +that was none of their business. As they neared the breakers of Puuiki, +below the mouth of Mamala, Puniaiki said to his men: "Turn the canoes +around and go shorewards." And in returning he said quickly, "Paddle +strong, for here we are on the top of a school of akus." But strange to +say, as the men looked in the water they saw no fish swimming about, +but on reaching Ulakua Puniaiki opened up the fish-hook, Kahuai, +from its wrapping in the gourd and held it in his hand. + +At this the akus, unprecedented in number, fairly leaped into the +canoes. They became so filled with the fish, without labor, that +they sank in the water as they reached Kapuukolo, and the men jumped +overboard to float them to the beach. The canoe men wondered greatly +at this work of the son-in-law of Kou the chief; and the shore people +shouted as the akus which filled the harbor swam toward the fishpond +of Kuwili and on to the mouth of Leleo stream. + +When the canoes touched shore Puniaiki seized two fishes in his hands +and went to join his father where he was staying, and Aiai directed +him to take them up to where his mother lived. These akus were not +gifts for her, but an offering to Ku-ula at a ko'a established just +above Kahuailanawai. Puniaiki obeyed the instructions of his father, +and on returning to him he was sent back to his mother, Puiwa, with +a supply of akus. She was greatly surprised that this handsome young +man, with his gift of akus for her to eat, was her own son, and these +were the first fruits of his labor. + +The people marvelled at the quantity of fish throughout the harbor, so +that even the stream at Kikihale was also full of akus, and Puniaiki +commanded the people to take of them day and night; and the news of +this visit of akus went all around Oahu. This unequalled haul of akus +was a great humiliation to Kou, affecting his fame as a fisherman; +but he was neither jealous of his son-in-law nor angry,--he just +sat silent. He thought much on the subject but with kindly feelings, +resulting in turning over this employment to him who could prosecute +it without worry. + +Shortly afterwards Aiai arranged with Puniaiki for the establishing +of ku-ulas, ko'as, and fish stones around the island of Oahu, which +were as follows: + +The Kou stone was for Honolulu and Kaumakapili; a ku-ula at Kupahu; +a fish stone at Hanapouli, Ewa. Ahuena was the ku-ula for Waipio; two +were assigned for Honouliuli. Hani-o was the name of the ko'a outside +of Kalaeloa; Kua and Maunalahilahi for Waianae; Kamalino for Waimea; +and Kaihukuuna for Laiemaloo, Koolau. + +Aiai and his son also visited Kauai and Niihau on this work, then +they turned and went together to Hawaii. The principal or most noted +fishing-grounds there are: Poo-a, Kahaka, and Olelomoana at Kona; +Kalae at Kau; Kupakea at Puna, and I at Hilo. + +In former times at most of these fishing-grounds were seen multitudes +and varieties of fish, all around the islands, and occasionally deep +sea kinds came close in shore, but in this new era there are not so +many. Some people say it is on account of the change of the times. + + + + +XXIII + +KANEAUKAI + +A LEGEND OF WAIALUA + +_Thos. G. Thrum_ + + +Long ago, when the Hawaiians were in the darkness of superstition and +kahunaism, with their gods and lords many, there lived at Mokuleia, +Waialua, two old men whose business it was to pray to Kaneaukai for +a plentiful supply of fish. These men were quite poor in worldly +possessions, but given to the habit of drinking a potion of awa after +their evening meal of poi and fish. + +The fish that frequented the waters of Mokuleia were the aweoweo, +kala, manini, and many other varieties that find their habitat inside +the coral reefs. Crabs of the white variety burrowed in the sand near +the seashore and were dug out by the people, young and old. The squid +also were speared by the skilful fishermen, and were eaten stewed, +or salted and sun-dried and roasted on the coals. The salt likely +came from Kaena Point, from salt-water evaporation in the holes of +rocks so plentiful on that stormy cape. Or it may have been made on +the salt pans of Paukauwila, near the stream of that name, where a +few years ago this industry existed on a small scale. + +But to return to our worshippers of Kaneaukai. One morning on going out +upon the seashore they found a log of wood, somewhat resembling the +human form, which they took home and set in a corner of their lowly +hut, and continued their habit of praying to Kaneaukai. One evening, +after having prepared a scanty supper of poi and salt, with perhaps a +few roasted kukui-nuts, as a relish, and a couple of cocoanut cups of +awa as their usual drink, they saw a handsome young man approaching, +who entered their hut and saluted them. He introduced himself by +saying, "I am Kaneaukai to whom you have been praying, and that which +you have set up is my image; you have done well in caring for it." + +He sat down, after the Hawaiian custom, as if to share their evening +meal, which the two old men invited him to partake of with them, but +regretted the scanty supply of awa. He said: "Pour the awa back into +the bowl and divide into three." This they did and at once shared +their meal with their guest. + +After supper Kaneaukai said to the two old men, "Go to Keawanui and +you will get fish enough for the present." He then disappeared, and +the fishermen went as instructed and obtained three fishes; one they +gave to an old sorceress who lived near by, and the other two they +kept for themselves. + +Soon after this there was a large school of fish secured by the +fishermen of Mokuleia. So abundant were the fish that after salting +all they could, there was enough to give away to the neighbors; +and even the dogs had more than they desired. + +Leaving the Mokuleia people to the enjoyment of their unusual +supply of fish, we will turn to the abode of two kahunas, who were +also fishermen, living on the south side of Waimea Valley, Oahu. One +morning, being out of fish, they went out into the harbor to try their +luck, and casting their net they caught up a calcareous stone about as +large as a man's head, and a pilot fish. They let the pilot fish go, +and threw the stone back into the sea. Again they cast their net and +again they caught the stone and the pilot fish; and so again at the +third haul. At this they concluded that the stone was a representative +of some god. The elder of the two said: "Let us take this stone ashore +and set it up as an idol, but the pilot fish we will let go." So they +did, setting it up on the turn of the bluff on the south side of the +harbor of Waimea. They built an inclosure about it and smoothed off +the rocky bluff by putting flat stones from the immediate neighborhood +about the stone idol thus strangely found. + +About ten days after the finding of the stone idol the two old kahunas +were sitting by their grass hut in the dusk of the evening, bewailing +the scarcity of fish, when Kaneaukai himself appeared before them +in the guise of a young man. He told them that they had done well in +setting up his stone image, and if they would follow his directions +they would have a plentiful supply of fish. Said he, "Go to Mokuleia, +and you will find my wooden idol; bring it here and set it up alongside +of my stone idol." But they demurred, as it was a dark night and there +were usually quicksands after a freshet in the Kamananui River. His +answer was, "Send your grandsons." And so the two young men were sent +to get the wooden idol and were told where they could find it. + +The young men started for Mokuleia by way of Kaika, near the place +where salt was made a few years ago. Being strangers, they were in +doubt about the true way, when a meteor (_hoku kaolele_) appeared and +went before them, showing them how to escape the quicksands. After +crossing the river they went on to Mokuleia as directed by Kaneaukai, +and found the wooden idol in the hut of the two old men. They +shouldered it, and taking as much dried fish as they could carry, +returned by the same way that they had come, arriving at home about +midnight. + +The next day the two old kahunas set up the wooden idol in the same +inclosure with the stone representative of Kaneaukai. The wooden +image has long since disappeared, having been destroyed, probably, +at the time Kaahumanu made a tour of Oahu after her conversion to +Christianity, when she issued her edict to burn all the idols. But +the stone idol was not destroyed. Even during the past sixty years +offerings of roast pigs are known to have been placed before it. This +was done secretly for fear of the chiefs, who had published laws +against idolatry. + +Accounts differ, various narrators giving the story some embellishments +of their own. So good a man as a deacon of Waialua in telling the +above seemed to believe that, instead of being a legend it was true; +for an old man, to whom he referred as authority, said that one of +the young men who went to Mokuleia and brought the wooden idol to +Waimea was his own grandfather. + +An aged resident of the locality gives this version: Following the +placement of their strangely found stone these two men dreamed of +Kaneaukai as a god in some far-distant land, to whom they petitioned +that he would crown their labors with success by granting them a +plentiful supply of fish. Dreaming thus, Kaneaukai revealed himself to +them as being already at their shore; that the stone which they had +been permitted to find and had honored by setting up at Kehauapuu, +was himself, in response to their petitions; and since they had +been faithful so far, upon continuance of the same, and offerings +thereto, they should ever after be successful in their fishing. As if +in confirmation of this covenant, this locality has ever since been +noted for the periodical visits of schools of the anae-holo and kala, +which are prevalent from April to July, coming, it is said, from Ohea, +Honuaula, Maui, by way of Kahuku, and returning the same way. + +So strong was the superstitious belief of the people in this deified +stone that when, some twenty years ago, the road supervisor of the +district threw it over and broke off a portion, it was prophesied +that Kaneaukai would be avenged for the insult. And when shortly +afterward the supervisor lost his position and removed from the +district, returning not to the day of his death; and since several +of his relatives have met untimely ends, not a few felt it was the +recompense of his sacrilegious act. + + + + +XXIV + +THE SHARK-MAN, NANAUE + +_Mrs. E. M. Nakuina_ + + +_Kamohoalii_, the King-shark of Hawaii and Maui, has several deep +sea caves that he uses in turn as his habitat. There are several of +these at the bottom of the palisades, extending from Waipio toward +Kohala, on the island of Hawaii. A favorite one was at Koamano, on the +mainland, and another was at Maiaukiu, the small islet just abreast +of the valley of Waipio. It was the belief of the ancient Hawaiians +that several of these shark gods could assume any shape they chose, +the human form even, when occasion demanded. + +In the reign of Umi, a beautiful girl, called Kalei, living in Waipio, +was very fond of shellfish, and frequently went to Kuiopihi for her +favorite article of diet. She generally went in the company of other +women, but if the sea was a little rough, and her usual companion +was afraid to venture out on the wild and dangerous beach, she very +often went alone rather than go without her favorite sea-shells. + +In those days the Waipio River emptied over a low fall into a basin +partly open to the sea; this basin is now completely filled up with +rocks from some convulsion of nature, which has happened since then. In +this was a deep pool, a favorite bathing-place for all Waipio. The +King shark god, Kamohoalii, used to visit this pool very often to +sport in the fresh waters of the Waipio River. Taking into account +the many different tales told of the doings of this shark god, he +must have had quite an eye for human physical beauty. + +Kalei, as was to be expected from a strong, well-formed Hawaiian girl +of those days, was an expert swimmer, a good diver, and noted for the +neatness and grace with which she would _lelekawa_ (jump from the +rocks into deep water) without any splashing of water, which would +happen to unskilful divers, from the awkward attitudes they would +assume in the act of jumping. + +It seems Kamohoalii, the King-shark, had noted the charms of the +beautiful Kalei, and his heart, or whatever answers in place of it with +fishes, had been captured by them. But he could not expect to make +much of an impression on the maiden's susceptibilities _in propria +persona_, even though he was perfectly able to take her bodily into +his capacious maw; so he must needs go courting in a more pleasing +way. Assuming the form of a very handsome man, he walked on the beach +one rather rough morning, waiting for the girl's appearance. + +Now the very wildness of the elements afforded him the chance he +desired, as, though Kalei was counted among the most agile and quick +of rock-fishers, that morning, when she did come, and alone, as her +usual companions were deterred by the rough weather, she made several +unsuccessful springs to escape a high threatening wave raised by the +god himself; and apparently, if it had not been for the prompt and +effective assistance rendered by the handsome stranger, she would +have been swept out into the sea. + +Thus an acquaintance was established. Kalei met the stranger from +time to time, and finally became his wife. + +Some little time before she expected to become a mother, her husband, +who all this time would only come home at night, told her his true +nature, and informing her that he would have to leave her, gave orders +in regard to the bringing up of the future child. He particularly +cautioned the mother never to let him be fed on animal flesh of any +kind, as he would be born with a dual nature, and with a body that +he could change at will. + +In time Kalei was delivered of a fine healthy boy, apparently the same +as any other child, but he had, besides the normal mouth of a human +being, a shark's mouth on his back between the shoulder blades. Kalei +had told her family of the kind of being her husband was, and they +all agreed to keep the matter of the shark-mouth on the child's back +a secret, as there was no knowing what fears and jealousies might be +excited in the minds of the King or high chiefs by such an abnormal +being, and the babe might be killed. + +The old grandfather, far from heeding the warning given by Kamohoalii +in the matter of animal diet, as soon as the boy, who was called +Nanaue, was old enough to come under the taboo in regard to the +eating of males, and had to take his meals at the mua house with the +men of the family, took especial pains to feed him on dog meat and +pork. He had a hope that his grandson would grow up to be a great, +strong man, and become a famous warrior; and there was no knowing +what possibilities lay before a strong, skilful warrior in those +days. So he fed the boy with meat, whenever it was obtainable. The +boy thrived, grew strong, big, and handsome as a young lama (_Maba +sandwicensis_) tree. + +There was another pool with a small fall of the Waipio River very +near the house of Kalei, and the boy very often went into it while +his mother watched on the banks. Whenever he got into the water he +would take the form of a shark and would chase and eat the small fish +which abounded in the pool. As he grew old enough to understand, +his mother took especial pains to impress on him the necessity of +concealing his shark nature from other people. + +This place was also another favorite bathing-place of the people, but +Nanaue, contrary to all the habits of a genuine Hawaiian, would never +go in bathing with the others, but always alone; and when his mother +was able, she used to go with him and sit on the banks, holding the +kapa scarf, which he always wore to hide the shark-mouth on his back. + +When he became a man, his appetite for animal diet, indulged +in childhood, had grown so strong that a human being's ordinary +allowance would not suffice for him. The old grandfather had died in +the meantime, so that he was dependent on the food supplied by his +stepfather and uncles, and they had to expostulate with him on what +they called his shark-like voracity. This gave rise to the common +native nickname of a _manohae_ (ravenous shark) for a very gluttonous +man, especially in the matter of meat. + +Nanaue used to spend a good deal of his time in the two pools, +the one inland and the other opening into the sea. The busy-bodies +(they had some in those days as well as now) were set to wondering +why he always kept a _kihei_, or mantle, on his shoulders; and for +such a handsomely shaped, athletic young man, it was indeed a matter +of wonder and speculation, considering the usual attire of the youth +of those days. He also kept aloof from all the games and pastimes +of the young people, for fear that the wind or some active movement +might displace the kapa mantle, and the shark-mouth be exposed to view. + +About this time children and eventually grown-up people began to +disappear mysteriously. + +Nanaue had one good quality that seemed to redeem his apparent +unsociability; he was almost always to be seen working in his +mother's taro or potato patch when not fishing or bathing. People +going to the sea beach would have to pass these potato or taro +patches, and it was Nanaue's habit to accost them with the query of +where they were going. If they answered, "To bathe in the sea," or, +"Fishing," he would answer, "Take care, or you may disappear head and +tail." Whenever he so accosted any one it would not be long before +some member of the party so addressed would be bitten by a shark. + +If it should be a man or woman going to the beach alone, that person +would never be seen again, as the shark-man would immediately follow, +and watching for a favorable opportunity, jump into the sea. Having +previously marked the whereabouts of the person he was after, it was an +easy thing for him to approach quite close, and changing into a shark, +rush on the unsuspecting person and drag him or her down into the +deep, where he would devour his victim at his leisure. This was the +danger to humanity which his king-father foresaw when he cautioned +the mother of the unborn child about feeding him on animal flesh, +as thereby an appetite would be evoked which they had no means of +satisfying, and a human being would furnish the most handy meal of +the kind that he would desire. + +Nanaue had been a man grown some time, when an order was promulgated +by Umi, King of Hawaii, for every man dwelling in Waipio to go to +_koele_ work, tilling a large plantation for the King. There were to +be certain days in an _anahulu_ (ten days) to be set aside for this +work, when every man, woman, and child had to go and render service, +excepting the very old and decrepit, and children in arms. + +The first day every one went but Nanaue. He kept on working in his +mother's vegetable garden to the astonishment of all who saw him. This +was reported to the King, and several stalwart men were sent after +him. When brought before the King he still wore his _kapa kihei_ +or mantle. + +The King asked him why he was not doing koele work with every one +else. Nanaue answered he did not know it was required of him. Umi +could not help admiring the bold, free bearing of the handsome man, +and noting his splendid physique, thought he would make a good warrior, +greatly wanted in those ages, and more especially in the reign of Umi, +and simply ordered him to go to work. + +Nanaue obeyed, and took his place in the field with the others, and +proved himself a good worker, but still kept on his kihei, which it +would be natural to suppose that he would lay aside as an incumbrance +when engaged in hard labor. At last some of the more venturesome of +the younger folks managed to tear his kapa off, as if accidentally, +when the shark-mouth on his back was seen by all the people near. + +Nanaue was so enraged at the displacement of his kapa and his +consequent exposure, that he turned and bit several of the crowd, +while the shark-mouth opened and shut with a snap, and a clicking sound +was heard such as a shark is supposed to make when baulked by its prey. + +The news of the shark-mouth and his characteristic shark-like actions +were quickly reported to the King, with the fact of the disappearance +of so many people in the vicinity of the pools frequented by Nanaue; +and of his pretended warnings to people going to the sea, which were +immediately followed by a shark bite or by their being eaten bodily, +with every one's surmise and belief that this man was at the bottom +of all those disappearances. The King believed it was even so, and +ordered a large fire to be lighted, and Nanaue to be thrown in to be +burnt alive. + +When Nanaue saw what was before him, he called on the shark god, +his father, to help him; then, seeming to be endowed with superhuman +strength in answer to his prayer, he burst the ropes with which he +had been bound in preparation for the burning, and breaking through +the throng of Umi's warriors, who attempted to detain him, he ran, +followed by the whole multitude, toward the pool that emptied into +the sea. When he got to the edge of the rocks bordering the pool, +he waited till the foremost persons were within arm's length, when +he leaped into the water and immediately turned into a large shark +on the surface of the water, in plain view of the people who had +arrived, and whose numbers were being continually augmented by more +and more arrivals. + +He lay on the surface some little time, as if to recover his breath, +and then turned over on his back, and raising his head partly out +of the water, snapped his teeth at the crowd who, by this time, +completely lined the banks, and then, as if in derision or defiance +of them, turned and flirted his tail at them and swam out to sea. + +The people and chiefs were for killing his mother and relatives for +having brought up such a monster. Kalei and her brothers were seized, +bound, and dragged before Umi, while the people clamored for their +immediate execution, or as some suggested, that they be thrown into +the fire lighted for Nanaue. + +But Umi was a wise king and would not consent to any such summary +proceedings, but questioned Kalei in regard to her fearful +offspring. The grieved and frightened mother told everything in +connection with the paternity and bringing up of the child, and with +the warning given by the dread sea-father. + +Umi considered that the great sea god Kamohoalii was on the whole a +beneficent as well as a powerful one. Should the relatives and mother +of that shark god's son be killed, there would then be no possible +means of checking the ravages of that son, who might linger around +the coast and creeks of the island, taking on human shape at will, +for the purpose of travelling inland to any place he liked, and then +reassume his fish form and lie in wait in the many deep pools formed +by the streams and springs. + +Umi, therefore, ordered Kalei and her relatives to be set at liberty, +while the priests and shark kahunas were requested to make offerings +and invocations to Kamohoalii that his spirit might take possession +of one of his _hakas_ (mediums devoted to his cult), and so express +to humanity his desires in regard to his bad son, who had presumed to +eat human beings, a practice well known to be contrary to Kamohoalii's +design. + +This was done, whereupon the shark god manifested himself through a +haka, and expressed his grief at the action of his wayward son. He +told them that the grandfather was to blame for feeding him on animal +flesh contrary to his orders, and if it were not for that extenuating +circumstance, he would order his son to be killed by his own shark +officers; but as it was, he would require of him that he should +disappear forever from the shores of Hawaii. Should Nanaue disregard +that order and be seen by any of his father's shark soldiers, he was +to be instantly killed. + +Then the shark god, who it seems retained an affection for his human +wife, exacted a promise that she and her relatives were to be forever +free from any persecutions on account of her unnatural son, on pain +of the return and freedom from the taboo of that son. + +Accordingly Nanaue left the island of Hawaii, crossed over to Maui, +and landing at Kipahulu, resumed his human shape and went inland. He +was seen by the people, and when questioned, told them he was a +traveller from Hawaii, who had landed at Hana and was going around +sightseeing. He was so good looking, pleasant, and beguiling in his +conversation that people generally liked him. He was taken as _aikane_ +by one of the petty chiefs of the place, who gave his own sister for +wife to Nanaue. The latter made a stipulation that his sleeping house +should be separated from that of his wife, on account of a pretended +vow, but really in order that his peculiar second mouth might escape +detection. + +For a while the charms of the pretty girl who had become his wife +seem to have been sufficient to prevent him from trying to eat human +beings, but after a while, when the novelty of his position as a +husband had worn off, and the desire for human flesh had again become +very strong, he resumed the old practice for which he had been driven +away from Hawaii. + +He was eventually detected in the very act of pushing a girl into the +sea, jumping in after her, then turning into a shark, and commencing +to devour her, to the horror of some people who were fishing with +hook and rod from some rocks where he had not observed them. These +people raised the alarm, and Nanaue seeing that he was discovered, +left for Molokai where he was not known. + +He took up his residence on Molokai at Poniuohua, adjoining the ahupuaa +of Kainalu, and it was not very long before he was at his old practice +of observing and accosting people, giving them his peculiar warning, +following them to the sea in his human shape, then seizing one of +them as a shark and pulling the unfortunate one to the bottom, where +he would devour his victim. In the excitement of such an occurrence, +people would fail to notice his absence until he would reappear +at some distant point far away from the throng, as if engaged in +shrimping or crabbing. + +This went on for some time, till the frightened and harassed people +in desperation went to consult a shark kahuna, as the ravages of the +man-eating shark had put a practical taboo on all kinds of fishing. It +was not safe to be anywhere near the sea, even in the shallowest water. + +The kahuna told them to lie in wait for Nanaue, and the next time +he prophesied that a person would be eaten head and tail, to have +some strong men seize him and pull off his kapa mantle, when a shark +mouth would be found on his back. This was done, and the mouth seen, +but the shark-man was so strong when they seized him and attempted to +bind him, that he broke away from them several times. He was finally +overpowered near the seashore and tightly bound. All the people then +turned their attention to gathering brush and firewood to burn him, +for it was well known that it is only by being totally consumed by +fire that a man-shark can be thoroughly destroyed, and prevented from +taking possession of the body of some harmless fish shark, who would +then be incited to do all the pernicious acts of a man-shark. + +While he lay there on the low sandy beach, the tide was coming in, and +as most of the people were returning with fagots and brush, Nanaue made +a supreme effort and rolled over so that his feet touched the water, +when he was enabled at once to change into a monster shark. Those who +were near him saw it, but were not disposed to let him off so easily, +and they ran several rows of netting makai, the water being very +shallow for quite a distance out. The shark's flippers were all bound +by the ropes with which the man Nanaue had been bound, and this with +the shallowness of the water prevented him from exerting his great +strength to advantage. He did succeed in struggling to the breakers, +though momentarily growing weaker from loss of blood, as the people +were striking at him with clubs, spears, stone adzes and anything +that would hurt or wound, so as to prevent his escape. + +With all that, he would have got clear, if the people had not called +to their aid the demigod Unauna, who lived in the mountains of upper +Kainalu. It was then a case of Akua _vs_. Akua, but Unauna was only a +young demigod, and not supposed to have acquired his full strength and +supernatural powers, while Nanaue was a full-grown man and shark. If +it had not been for the latter's being hampered by the cords with +which he was bound, the nets in his way, as well as the loss of blood, +it is fully believed that he would have got the better of the young +local presiding deity; but he was finally conquered and hauled up on +the hill slopes of Kainalu to be burnt. + +The shallow ravine left by the passage of his immense body over the +light yielding soil of the Kainalu Hill slope can be seen to this +day, as also a ring or deep groove completely around the top of a +tall insulated rock very near the top of Kainalu Hill, around which +Unauna had thrown the rope, to assist him in hauling the big shark +uphill. The place was ever afterwards called Puumano (Shark Hill), +and is so known to this day. + +Nanaue was so large, that in the attempt to burn him, the blood +and water oozing out of his burning body put out the fire several +times. Not to be outwitted in that way by the shark son of Kamohoalii, +Unauna ordered the people to cut and bring for the purpose of splitting +into knives, bamboos from the sacred grove of Kainalu. The shark flesh +was then cut into strips, partly dried, and then burnt, but the whole +bamboo grove had to be used before the big shark was all cut. The god +Mohoalii (another form of the name of the god Kamohoalii), father +of Unauna, was so angered by the desecration of the grove, or more +likely on account of the use to which it was put, that he took away +all the edge and sharpness from the bamboos of this grove forever, +and to this day they are different from the bamboos of any other +place or grove on the islands, in this particular, that a piece of +them cannot cut any more than any piece of common wood. + + + + +XXV + +FISH STORIES AND SUPERSTITIONS + +_Translated by M. K. Nakuina_ + + +The following narration of the different fishes here given is told +and largely believed in by native fishermen. All may not agree as to +particulars in this version, but the main features are well known +and vary but little. Some of these stories are termed mythical, in +others the truth is never questioned, and together they have a deep +hold on the Hawaiian mind. Further and confirmatory information may +be obtained from fishermen and others, and by visiting the market +the varieties here mentioned may be seen almost daily. + +In the olden time certain varieties of fish were tabooed and could +not be caught at all times, being subject to the kapu of Ku-ula, the +fish god, who propagated the finny tribes of Hawaiian waters. While +deep sea fishing was more general, that in the shallow sea, or along +shore, was subject to the restrictions of the konohiki of the land, +and aliis, both as to certain kinds and periods. The sign of the +shallow sea kapu was the placing of branches of the hau tree all along +the shore. The people seeing this token of the kapu respected it, and +any violation thereof in ancient times was said to be punishable by +death. While this kapu prevailed the people resorted to the deep sea +stations for their food supply. With the removal of the hau branches, +indicating that the kapu was lifted, the people fished as they desired, +subject only to the makahiki taboo days of the priest or alii, when +no canoes were allowed to go out upon the water. + +The first fish caught by a fisherman, or any one else, was marked +and dedicated to Ku-ula. After this offering was made, Ku-ula's right +therein being thus recognized, they were free from further oblations so +far as that particular variety of fish was concerned. All fishermen, +from Hawaii to Niihau, observed this custom religiously. When the +fishermen caught a large supply, whether by the net, hook, or shell, +but one of a kind, as just stated, was reserved as an offering to +Ku-ula; the remainder was then free to the people. + + + +DEIFIED FISH SUPERSTITION + + +Some of the varieties of fish we now eat were deified and prayed to +by the people of the olden time, and even some Hawaiians of to-day +labor under like superstition with regard to sharks, eels, oopus, +and some others. They are afraid to eat or touch these lest they +suffer in consequence; and this belief has been perpetuated, handed +down from parents to children, even to the present day. The writer +was one of those brought up to this belief, and only lately has eaten +the kapu fish of his ancestors without fearing a penalty therefor. + + + +STORY OF THE ANAE-HOLO + + +The anae-holo is a species of mullet unlike the shallow water, or +pond, variety; and the following story of its habit is well known to +any _kupa_ (native born) of Oahu. + +The home of the anae-holo is at Honouliuli, Pearl Harbor, at a +place called Ihuopalaai. They make periodical journeys around to +the opposite side of the island, starting from Puuloa and going to +windward, passing successively Kumumanu, Kalihi, Kou, Kalia, Waikiki, +Kaalawai and so on, around to the Koolau side, ending at Laie, and +then returning by the same course to their starting-point. This fish +is not caught at Waianae, Kaena, Waialua, Waimea, or Kahuku because +it does not run that way, though these places are well supplied with +other kinds. The reason given for this is as follows: + +Ihuopalaai had a Ku-ula, and this fish god supplied anaes. Ihuopalaai's +sister took a husband and went and lived with him at Laie, +Koolauloa. In course of time a day came when there was no fish to +be had. In her distress and desire for some she bethought herself of +her brother, so she sent her husband to Honouliuli to ask Ihuopalaai +for a supply, saying: "Go to Ihuopalaai, my brother, and ask him for +fish. If he offers you dried fish, refuse it by all means;--do not +take it, because the distance is so long that you would not be able +to carry enough to last us for any length of time." + +When her husband arrived at Honouliuli he went to Ihuopalaai and +asked him for fish. His brother-in-law gave him several large bundles +of dried fish, one of which he could not very well lift, let alone +carry a distance. This offer was refused and reply given according to +instruction. Ihuopalaai sat thinking for some time and then told him to +return home, saying: "You take the road on the Kona side of the island; +do not sit, stay, nor sleep on the way till you reach your own house." + +The man started as directed, and Ihuopalaai asked Ku-ula to send fish +for his sister, and while the man was journeying homeward as directed +a school of fish was following in the sea, within the breakers. He +did not obey fully the words of Ihuopalaai, for he became so tired +that he sat down on the way; but he noticed that whenever he did so +the fish rested too. The people seeing the school of fish went and +caught some of them. Of course, not knowing that this was his supply, +he did not realize that the people were taking his fish. Reaching home, +he met his wife and told her he had brought no fish, but had seen many +all the way, and pointed out to her the school of anae-holo which was +then resting abreast of their house. She told him it was their supply, +sent by Ihuopalaai, his brother-in-law. They fished, and got all they +desired, whereupon the remainder returned by the same way till they +reached Honouliuli where Ihuopalaai was living. Ever afterward this +variety of fish has come and gone the same way every year to this day, +commencing some time in October and ending in March or April. + +Expectant mothers are not allowed to eat of the anae-holo, nor the +aholehole, fearing dire consequences to the child, hence they never +touch them till after the eventful day. Nor are these fish ever +given to children till they are able to pick and eat them of their +own accord. + + + +MYTH OF THE HILU + + +The hilu is said to have once possessed a human form, but by some +strange event its body was changed to that of a fish. No knowledge of +its ancestry or place of origin is given, but the story is as follows: + +Hilu-ula and Hilu-uli were born twins, one a male and the other a +female. They had human form, but with power to assume that of the fish +now known as hilu. The two children grew up together and in due time +when Hilu-uli, the sister, was grown up, she left her brother and +parents without saying a word and went into the sea, and, assuming +her fish form, set out on a journey, eventually reaching Heeia, +Koolaupoko. During the time of her journey she increased the numbers +of the hilu so that by the time they came close to Heeia there was so +large a school that the sea was red with them. When the people of Heeia +and Kaneohe saw this, they paddled out in their canoes to discover +that it was a fish they had never seen nor heard of before. Returning +to the shore for nets, they surrounded the school and drew in so many +that they were not able to care for them in their canoes. The fishes +multiplied so rapidly that when the first school was surrounded and +dragged ashore, another one appeared, and so on, till the people were +surfeited. Yet the fish stayed in the locality, circling around. The +people ate of them in all styles known to Hawaiians; raw, lawalued, +salted, and broiled over a fire of coals. + +While the Koolau people were thus fishing and feasting, Hilu-ula, +the brother, arrived among them in his human form; and when he saw +the hilu-uli broiling over the coal fire he recognized the fish form +of his sister. This so angered him that he assumed the form of a +whirlwind and entered every house where they had hilu and blew the +fish all back into the sea. Since then the hilu-uli has dark scales, +and is well known all over the islands. + + + +THE HOU, OR SNORING FISH + + +The hou lives in shallow water. When fishing with torches on a +quiet, still night, if one gets close to where it is sleeping it +will be heard to snore as if it were a human being. This is a small, +beautifully colored fish. Certain sharks also, sleeping in shallow +water, can be heard at times indulging in the same habit. + + + +There are many kinds of fish known to these islands, and other stories +connected with them, which, if gathered together, would make an +interesting collection of yarns as "fishy" as any country can produce. + + +THE END + + + + +GLOSSARY OF HAWAIIAN WORDS + + +aaho, p. 142. + +ahaaina, feast, p. 150. + +aheahea, p. 135. + +aholehole, a species of fish. + +ahos, small sticks used in thatching, p. 245. + +Ahu o Kakaalaneo, the name given to the original feather cloak, +p. 155. + +ahupuaa, a small division of a country under the care of a head man. + +ahuula, a feather cloak, p. 155. + +Ai Kanaka, man eater, p. 191. + +aikane, an intimate friend of the same sex, p. 264. + +Aina-i ka-kaupo-o-Kane (the land in the heart of Kane), the primeval +home of mankind, p. 17. + +Aina kumupuaa a Kane, see Kan-aka-maoli. + +Aina lauena a Kane, p. 24. + +Aina-wai-akua-a-Kane (the land of the divine water of Kane), the +primeval home of mankind, p. 17. + +aipunpuu, chief cook or steward, p. 141. + +akaaka laughter, p. 118. + +aku, a species of fish, the bonito. + +akua, a deity, p. 184. + +akule, a species of fish. + +ala, a smooth, round stone. + +alae, mud-hens, p. 33. + +alaea, red earth, of which the body of the first man was made, p. 16. + +Alehe-ka-la, sun snarer, p. 32. + +alii, chief. + +Alii aimoku, sovereign of the land. + +aloha, a word betokening greeting or farewell. + +Aloha ino oe, eia ihonei paha oe e make ai, he ai mainei Pele, +Compassion great to you! Close here, perhaps, is your death; Pele +comes devouring, p. 40. + +Aloha oe! Alas for you! p. 41. + +anae-holo, p. 270. + +anahulu, a period of ten days. + +Ana puhi, eel's cave, p. 188. + +ano akua nae, p. 51. + +Aole! no! p. 40. + +ao poko, short cloud, p. 207. + +apapani (or apapane), a scarlet bird, p. 182. + +a-pe, a plant having broad leaves of an acrid taste, like kalo, +but stronger. + +auki, the ki leaf (Dracaena terminalis), p. 119. + +Aumakua, ancestral shades, p. 93; god, p. 220. + +aupehu, p. 220. + +auwai, watercourse, p. 110. + +Auwe ka make! alas, he is dead! p. 176. + +awa, the name of a plant of a bitter, acrid taste, from which +an intoxicating drink is made; also the name of the liquor itself, +expressed from the root of the plant. + +aweoweo, a species of reddish fish. + + +Eia o Hana la he aina aupehu; o Hana keia i ka ia iki; ka ia o Kama; +ka ia o Lanakila, p. 220. + +Elepaio, a small green bird (Chasiempis sandwichensis), p. 125. + + +ha, the lower stem of leaves when cut from the root, p. 114. + +haawe, back-load, p. 126. + +haka, a medium devoted to the cult of a god, p. 263. + +hala tree (Pandanus odoratissimus), p. 121. + +halau, shed, p. 113. + +hau, a forest tree--a species of hibiscus; also, the bark of this +tree from which ropes are made. + +he ekolu ula o ka la, the third brightness of the sun, p. 204. + +hee kupua, wonderful octopus, p. 234. + +heiau, temple. + +he keehina honua a Kane, p. 15. + +he 'lii kahuli, p. 19. + +He Lualoa no Na 'lii, a deep pit for the chiefs, p. 241. + +he mau anahulu, about thirty days. + +He po hookahi, a ao ua pau, in one night, and by dawn it is finished, +p. 109. + +He waa halau Alii o ka Moku, the royal vessel, the ark, p. 20. + +hiaku, name of a place in the sea beyond the kaiuli, and inside +the kohola, p. 242. + +Hi-ka-po-loa, Most Excellent, p. 15 + +Hilo, the first day (of the new moon), p. 75. + +hilu, a species of fish, spotted with various colors, p. 273. + +hinahina, leaves of a gray or withered appearance, p. 98. + +hinalea, a species of small fish. + +hokeo, a fisherman's gourd. + +hoku kaolele, a meteor, p. 253. + +holua, sled. + +honu, sea turtle, p. 183. + +hou, a species of fish, p. 274. + +hula, drum. + + +ieie, the leaves of the ie, a decorative vine. + +iiwi, a small red bird. + +i ka muli o Hea, p. 24. + +Ikiki, a summer month--July or August, p. 74. + +i kini akua, spirits, angels. + +Ikua, a winter month--December or January, p. 74. + +i kuhaia, the spittle of the gods, p. 18. + +ilalo loa i ka po, p. 18. + +ili hau, the bark of the hau tree from which ropes are made, p. 218. + +ilio, dog. + +i mea ole, nothing. + +imu, oven. + +iwi kuamoo, the backbone. + + +ka aina i ka haupo a Kane, p. 24. + +ka aina momona a Kane, p. 24. + +kaao, legend-bearer, p. 108. + +ka holua ana o Kahawali, Kahawali's sliding-place, p. 39. + +kahu, keeper, p. 188. + +kahuna lapaau, medical priest, p. 53. + +Kaiakahinalii, the Flood, p. 20. + +Kai a Kahinalii, Sea of Kahinalaa, p. 37. + +kai-ula-a-Kane, the Red Sea of Kane, p. 24. + +kaiuli, the deep sea. + +kai waena, middle post (of a house), p. 223. + +Kakelekele, hydropathic cure, p. 126. + +kala, a species of fish. + +Ka lae o ka ilio, the dog's forehead, p. 240. + +Ka lae o ka laau, p. 240. + +Kalana-i hau-ola (Kalana with the life-giving dew), the primeval +home of mankind, p. 17. + +kalo, the well-known vegetable of Hawaii, a species of Arum +esculentum; Colocasia antiquorum, p. 131. + +kamaainas, original inhabitants, p. 140. + +kamani tree, Calophyllum inophyllum, p. 72. + +kanaka, a man; the general name of men, women, and children of all +classes, in distinction from animals. + +Kanaka-maoli, the people living on the mainland of Kane (Aina +kumupuaa a Kane), p. 22. + +Kane, sunlight, p. 15. + +kanekoa, a deity, p. 184. + +Kane-laa-uli, the fallen chief, he who fell on account of the tree, +p. 17. + +Kanikau, lamentation, p. 181. + +ka one lauena a Kane, p. 24. + +kapa, the cloth beaten from the bark of the paper mulberry, also +from the bark of several other trees; hence, cloth of any kind; +clothing generally. + +Kapapahanaumoku, the island bearing rock or stratum, p. 49. + +ka poe keo keo maoli, p. 22. + +kapu, sacred. + +kapu-hoano, sacred or holy days, p. 24. + +kapuku, the restoration to life of the dead, p. 151. + +Ka Punahou, the new spring, p. 37. + +Kauakiowao, Mountain Mist, p. 133. + +Kauawaahila, Waahila Rain, p. 133. + +kau i ka lele, p. 209. + +ki-wai-ola-loa-a-Kane, p. 23. + +kawelewele, guiding-ropes, p. 115. + +Keakeomilu, the liver of Milu, p. 56. + +keawemanhili, a deity, p. 184, + +Keinohoomanawanui, a sloven, one persistently unclean, p. 88. + +Ke po-lua ahi, the pit of fire, inferno, p. 18. + +Ke ue nei au ia olua, I grieve for you two, p. 41. + +ki, a plant having a saccharine root, the leaves of which are used +for wrapping up bundles of food; the leaves are also used as food +for cattle and for thatching. + +kihei, a mantle worn over the shoulders. + +kilu, play, or game, p. 127. + +koa tree, Acacia koa. + +ko'a aina aumakua, fishing-station, p. 229. + +ko'a ia, fishing-station. + +ko'a ku-ula, p. 227. + +ko'a lawaia, fishing-station, p. 222. + +koali, same as kowali. + +koas, fighting men, p. 157. + +koele, a small division of land; hence, a field planted by the +tenants for a landlord; a garden belonging to the chief, but cultivated +by his people, p. 260. + +kohola, a reef. + +kolea, plover, p. 71. + +kona, a severe storm that comes up from the equator, p. 183. + +konane, a game like checkers. + +Konohiki, feudal lord, a head man with others under him. + +konohili, wife of a feudal lord, p. 87. + +kou, a large shade tree growing mostly near the sea, p. 161. + +kowali, convolvulus vine, a swing made of these vines, p. 46. + +Ku, Substance. + +ku, arose, p. 24. + +kuaha, a stone-paved platform, p. 156. + +Ku-Kaua-Kahi, a triad--the Fundamental Supreme Unity, p. 15. + +kukini, trained runner. + +kuko, to wish, to lust, p. 89. + +kukui tree, Aleurites molluccana, p. 88. + +Kulu-ipo, the fallen chief, he who fell on account of the tree, +p. 17. + +kumukahi, east wind, p. 41. + +Kumu-uli, the fallen tree, he who fell on account of the tree, p. 17. + +kupa, native born person, p. 271. + +Kupapau o Puupehe, Tomb of Puupehe, p. 181. + +kupua, demigod, p. 43. + +ku-ula, fishing-station. + + +Lae, cape (of land), p. 148. + +la-i leaves, dracaena leaves. + +laka loa, p. 216. + +lalo puhaka, p. 16. + +lama, a forest tree (Maba sandwicensis) which has very hard wood, +p. 258. + +lana, floating, p. 20. + +lanai, arbor, p. 150. + +lau, four hundred, p. 190. + +lauele, a species of turnip. + +lawalu, to cook meat on the coals wrapped in ki leaves, p. 147. + +leho, kauri shell. + +lehoula, a species of leho of a red color, a red shell-fish. + +lehua tree, Metrosideros polymorpha. + +leiomano, shark's tooth weapon, p. 203. + +leis, wreaths. + +lele, p. 150. + +lelekawa, to jump from the rocks into deep water, p. 256. + +lele kowali, p. 46. + +Lelepua, arrow flight, p. 88. + +lepo ula, red earth, of which the body of the first man was made, +p. 16. + +lilo ai kona ola a make iho la, p. 55. + +limu, sea-moss, p. 242. + +Lo Aikanaka, the last of the man-eating chiefs. + +lomilomi, to rub or chafe the body. + +Lono, Sound. + +lua, killing by breaking the bones, p. 142. + +Lua o Milu, the nether world, p. 46. + +luau, the kalo leaf; boiled herbs; young kalo leaves gathered and +cooked for food. + +ma, a syllable signifying accompanying, together, etc., p. 54. + +maika, the name of a popular game; also, the stone used for rolling +in that game, p. 157. + +mai ka po mia, from the time of night, darkness, chaos, p. 15. + +mai, komo mai, p. 78. + +maile, Alyxia olivaeformis, p. 120; fine-leaved variety, Maile +laulii, p. 95. + +makaha, floodgates, p. 142. + +makahelei, drawn eyes, p. 120. + +makahiki, the name of the first day of the year, p. 270. + +makai, seaward, p. 217. + +Makakehau, Misty Eyes, p. 182. + +malailua, goats without horns, such as were found on Mauna Loa, +p. 24. + +malau, a place in the sea where the water is still and quiet; +a place where the bait for the aku or bonito is found, p. 246. + +malos, girdles worn by the males. + +mamani, p. 173. + +manaiaakalani, p. 218. + +mana kupua, miraculous power, p. 215. + +manawa ole, in no time, p. 110; in a short time, p. 113. + +manienie-akiaki, a medicinal grass of the olden time, p. 135. + +manini, a species of fish caught by diving, p. 250. + +mano, dam, p. 110. + +manohae, a ravenous shark, p. 259. + +maoli, a species of banana; the long, dark-colored plantain, p. 150. + +mauka, inland. + +Milu, inferno. + +Moi, sovereign, p. 186. + +moi, a species of fish of a white color. + +moo, a general name for all lizards, a serpent. + +Moo-kapu, sacred lands, p. 210. + +mua, p. 258. + + +Na akua aumakua o ka poe kahuna kalai waa, p. 216. + +nae, the farther side, p. 116. + +na-u, jessamine, gardenia. + +noa, pertaining to the lower class of people, p. 135. + + +O haehae ka manu, ke ale nei ka wai, p. 95. + +ohelo, a species of small reddish berry; the Hawaiian whortleberry, +p. 182. + +ohia, native apple. + +ohia hemolele, the sacred apple-tree, p. 17. + +ohiki-makaloa, long-eyed sand-crabs, p. 70. + +ohua, the name given to the young of the manini fish. + +Oi-e, Most Excellent, p. 15. + +Oio, p. 48. + +oio, a species of fish. + +oo, digger, p. 52. + +oopu, a species of small fish living in fresh water rivers and ponds. + +opae, a small fish; a shrimp; a crab. + +opihi-koele, a species of shell-fish, p. 224. + +opihis, shell-fish, p. 70. + + +pa, wall, p. 157. + +pa, fish-hook, p. 247. + +pa hi aku, fish-pearl. + +pahoa, stone hatchet. + +pahoehoe, smooth, shining lava. + +pahonua, place of refuge, p. 156. + +pahoola, a remnant, a piece, p. 56. + +pahu kaeke, p. 186. + +paiula, the royal red kapa of old, p 145. + +pakai, an herb used for food in time of scarcity. + +pakui, a house joined to a house above--that is, a tower, p. 158. + +pala, ripe, soft; also, as a noun, a vegetable used as food in time +of scarcity. + +pale, a director, p. 115. + +pali, precipice. + +Pali-uli (the blue mountain), the primeval home of mankind, p. 17. + +palolo, whitish clay, of which the head of the first man was made, +p. 16. + +pani, a stoppage, a closing up, that which stops or closes. + +papa holua, a flat sled, p. 40. + +pa-u, skirt. + +pihoihoi loa, p. 206. + +pili, the long, coarse grass used in thatching houses, p. 158. + +pipipi, p. 54. + +po, night, chaos, pp. 15, 49. + +poe poi-uhane, spirit catchers, p. 129. + +pohaku-ia, fish stone, p. 241. + +poi, the paste or pudding which was formerly the chief food of the +Hawaiians, and still is so to a great extent. It is made of kalo, +sweet potatoes, or breadfruit, but mostly of kalo, by baking the above +articles in an underground oven, and then peeling or pounding them, +adding a little water; it is then left in a mass to ferment; after +fermentation, it is again worked over with more water until it has +the consistency of thick paste. It is eaten cold with the fingers. + +Po-ia-milu, inferno, p. 18. + +Po-kini-kini, inferno, p. 18. + +Po-kua-kini, inferno, p. 18. + +po o akua, p. 205. + +Po-papa-ia-owa, inferno, p. 18. + +Po-pau-ole, inferno, p. 18. + +popolo, a plant sometimes eaten in times of scarcity, also used as +a medicine. + +pouhana, end post (of a house). + +poumanu, corner post (of a house), p. 210. + +pou o manu, corner post (of a house), p. 223. + +pu, head, p. 115. + +puaa, a hog, p. 16. + +puhala, the hala tree, p. 233. + +puhi, eel, sea snake. + +puholoholo, to cook (food) by rolling with hot stones in a covered +gourd, p. 135. + +puloulou, sign of kapu, p. 119. + +puni ka hiamoe, p. 81. + +puoa, a burial tower, p. 148. + + +Reinga, the leaping place, p. 50. + + +tapa, p. 144. + + +Ua, rain, p. 169. + +ua haki ka pule, p. 208. + +ueue, bait, p. 225. + +uhae ia, p. 134. + +uhu, a species of fish about the size of the salmon, p. 241. + +uki, a plant or shrub sometimes used in thatching; a species of +grass, p. 98. + +uku, a species of fish. + +Ulu kapu a Kane, the breadfruit tabooed for Kane, p. 17. + +uo, a part of the process of feather cloak making, p. 155. + +uwau, a species of bird; a kind of waterfowl. + + +waa, canoe, p. 194. + +waa halau, see He waa halau Alii o ka Moku. + +Wai a Hiku, water of Hiku, p. 44 + +Waiakoloa, p. 192. + +Wai nao, the spittle of the gods, p. 16. + +waoke, banana, p. 79. + +Wawa ka Menehune i Puukapele, ma Kauai, puohu ka manu o ka loko o +Kawainui ma Koolaupoko, Oahu, the hum of the voices of the Menehunes +at Puukapele, Kauai, startled the birds of the pond of Kawainui, +at Koolaupoko, Oahu, p. 111. + +wiliwili tree, Erythrina monosperma, p. 121. + + + + +NOTES + + +[1] Now the Leper Settlement. + +[2] The hill visible from the Lahaina anchorage to the north of +Lahainaluna School, and near to it. + +[3] It is not a little remarkable that the progress of Pele, as stated +in this tradition, agrees with geological observation in locating +the earliest volcanic action in this group, on the island of Kauai, +and the latest, on the island of Hawaii.--_Translator._ + +[4] Ellis's "Polynesian Researches," pp. 365-7. + +[5] Dibble's History, p. 99. + +[6] An initiatory act, as in the priesthood. + +[7] O the four thousand gods, + The forty thousand gods, + The four hundred thousand gods, + The file of gods, + The assembly of gods! + O gods of these woods, + Of the mountain, + And the knoll, + At the water-dam, + Oh, come! + +[8] A species of drum made out of a hollowed section of the trunk of a +cocoanut tree and covered over one end with sharkskin. It was generally +used in pairs, one larger than the other, somewhat after the idea of +the bass and tenor drums of civilized nations. One of these drums was +placed on either side of the performer, and the drumming was performed +with both hands by tapping with the fingers. By peculiar variations +of the drumming, known only to the initiated, the performer could +drum out whatever he wished to express in such a way, it is alleged, +as to be intelligible to initiated listeners without uttering a single +syllable with the voice. + +[9] Situated beyond Diamond Head. + +[10] In Nuuanu Valley. + +[11] When the moon is twenty-seven days old. + + + + + + + +Hawaiian Yesterdays + +_By Dr. Henry M. Lyman_ + + +"Belongs to the small and choice class of books which were written +for the mere joy of calling back days that are past, and with little +thought that other eyes than those of the most intimate friends of the +writer would ever read the pages in which he had set down the memories +of his childhood and youth. In this instance the childhood and youth +were passed among the most unusual surroundings, and the memories +are such as no one born of the present generation can ever hope to +have. Dr. Lyman was born in Hilo in 1835, the child of missionary +parents. With an artistic touch which has placed the sketches just +published among 'the books which are books,' he has given an unequaled +picture of a boyhood lived under tropical skies. As I read on and +on through his delightful pages memories came back to me of three +friends of my own childhood--'Robinson Crusoe,' 'The Swiss Family +Robinson,' and 'Masterman Ready'--and I would be glad to know that +all, old and young, who have enjoyed those immortal tales would take +to their hearts this last idyl of an island."--_Sara Andrew Shafer, +in the N.Y. Times Saturday Review._ + + +"It is a delicious addition to the pleasanter, less serious literature +about Hawaii... A record of the recollections of the first eighteen +years of a boy's life, in Hawaii, where that life was ushered into +being. They are told after the mellowing lapse of half a century, +which has been very full of satisfying labors in an ennobling +profession... Pure boyhood recollections, unadulterated by later visits +to the scenes in which they had their birth"--_The Hawaiian Star_. + +"'Hawaiian Yesterdays' is a book you will like to read. Whatever +else it is, every page of it is in its own way literature.... It is +because of this characteristic, the perfect blending of memory and +imagination, that these personal descriptive reminiscences of the +childhood and early youth of the author in the Hawaiian Islands, in +the times of those marvelous missionary ventures and achievements near +the beginning of the last century, that this book takes its place as +literature."--_Chicago Evening Post._ + +"Keeping the more serious and sometimes tragic elements in the +background, the book gives, in a most interesting way, the youthful +impressions and occupations and amusements of the writer. Indeed, not +a few of his pages, in their graphic account of ingenious adaptation of +means to ends, are agreeably reminiscent--unintentionally reminiscent, +no doubt--of that classic of our childhood, 'The Swiss Family +Robinson.' Could a reviewer bestow higher praise."--_The Dial_. + +"The author gives some delightful pictures of the islands, the +people and the manner of living. There is a good deal of life +and color and much interesting statement, particularly as to the +life of the kings and queens who ruled like despots over the tiny +kingdom."--_Philadelphia Inquirer_. + +"Evidently the author, even in boyhood, had a boundless love and +admiration for the works of nature, for some of his descriptions of +that wonderfully creviced and volcano-studded land are truly marvelous +in their vivid and beautiful portrayal."--_Oregon Journal_. + +"If one desires to obtain an impression of the inside of the mission +work which transformed the character of the Sandwich Islanders, +as they used to be known, from heathenism to Christianity, he will +find it in this interesting volume. It is a description of conditions +in the Hawaiian Islands at the time when American missionaries were +establishing their work."--_The Standard_. + +"The volume is unique in that it relates to a period about which +American readers have known little."--_Boston Transcript_. + + +_With numerous illustrations from photographs_ + +_$2.00 net_ + +A. C. McClurg & Co., Publishers + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Hawaiian Folk Tales, by Various + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HAWAIIAN FOLK TALES *** + +***** This file should be named 18450.txt or 18450.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/8/4/5/18450/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ (This file was +made using scans of public domain works from the University +of Michigan Digital Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |